MELSEC iQ-F

FX5 Ethernet Module User's Manual

-FX5-ENET
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full
attention to safety in order to handle the product correctly.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories: [ WARNING] and [ CAUTION].

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by [ CAUTION] may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be read whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

1
 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to set up the following safety circuits outside the PLC to ensure safe system operation
even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause
serious accidents.
- Most importantly, set up the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock
circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to
prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
- Note that when the CPU module detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-
diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the CPU
module occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits
and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
- Note that when an error occurs in a relay, transistor or triac of an output circuit, the output might
stay on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and
mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
● In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the current rating or an overcurrent caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure of the network, refer to relevant
manuals for the network. Incorrect output or malfunction may result in an accident.
● Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the whole system always operates on the safe
side before executing the control (for data change) of the PLC in operation.
Read the manual thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls (for program
change, parameter change, forcible output and operation status change) of the PLC in operation.
Otherwise, the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur due to erroneous operations.
● Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller,
immediate action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a
communication failure. Determine the handling method as a system when communication failure
occurs along with configuration of interlock circuit on a program, by considering the external
equipment and CPU module.
● Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the
intelligent function module. Executing data writing to the "system area" or "write-protect area" may
cause malfunction of the programmable controller alarm. For the "system area" or "write-protect
area", refer to  Page 136 Buffer Memory.
● If a communication cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication
failure of multiple stations. Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the system always
operates on the safe side even if communications fail. Incorrect output or malfunction may result in an
accident.

2
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.
● When an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled, a large current
(approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on. Take
proper measures so that the flowing current does not exceed the value corresponding to the
maximum load specification of the resistance load.
● Do not power off the CPU module or reset the CPU module while the settings are being written. Doing
so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and
written to the flash ROM again. Doing so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

[SECURITY PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and
the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other
cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as
firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring
work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
● Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in the User's Manual
(Hardware) of the CPU module used.
Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt
air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature,
condensation, or rain and wind.
If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage
may occur.

3
 [INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly. Doing so may cause device failures or
malfunctions.
● When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the
ventilation slits of the PLC. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
● For the product supplied together with a dust proof sheet, the sheet should be affixed to the ventilation
slits before the installation and wiring work to prevent foreign objects such as cutting and wiring
debris.
However, when the installation work is completed, make sure to remove the sheet to provide
adequate ventilation. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
● Install the product on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the
PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
● Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
● Work carefully when using a screwdriver such as installation of the product. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the product or accidents.
● Connect the extension cables, peripheral cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable
securely to their designated connectors. Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
● Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so
may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripherals, expansion board, expansion adapter, and connector conversion adapter
- Extension modules, bus conversion module, and connector conversion module
- Battery

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring
work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
● Make sure to attach the terminal cover, provided as an accessory, before turning on the power or
initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
● The temperature rating of the cable should be 80 or more.
● Make sure to properly wire to the spring clamp terminal block in accordance with the following
precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a shortcircuit, wire
breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Twist the ends of stranded wires and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly
stressed.

4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 or less) of the grounding terminal on the CPU
module and extension modules with a wire 2 mm2 or thicker. Do not use common grounding with
heavy electrical systems (refer to the User's Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module used).
● Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100
or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
● Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to terminal blocks, or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
● Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or
accidents due to malfunction of the PLC caused by abnormal data written to the PLC due to the
effects of noise.
- Do not bundle the control line and communication cables together with or lay them close to the
main circuit, high-voltage line, load line or power line. As a guideline, lay the power line, control
line and communication cables at least 100mm away from the main circuit, high-voltage line, load
line or power line.
- Ground the shield of the shielded wire or shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not
use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
● For Ethernet cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications described in
 Page 67 Wiring Products. If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.

[STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or
malfunctions.
● Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally. Failure to
do so in the power-on status may cause electric shock.
● Before modifying the program in operation, forcible output, running or stopping the PLC, read through
this manual carefully, and ensure complete safety. An operation error may damage the machinery or
cause accidents.
● Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same
time. (i.e. from an engineering tool and a GOT) Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the
PLC program.

5
 [STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data
of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the
entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification,
parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller,
read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper
operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
● Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate
action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication
failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions
to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
● Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
● Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so
may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripherals, expansion board, expansion adapter, and connector conversion adapter
- Extension modules, bus conversion module, and connector conversion module
- Battery
● Read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before performing online operations (operation
status change) with peripheral devices connected to the CPU modules of other stations. Improper
operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

[OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the whole system always operates on the safe
side before executing the control (for data change) of the PLC in operation. Read the manual
thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls (for program change,
parameter change, forcible output and operation status change) of the PLC in operation. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur by erroneous operations.
● Do not power off the CPU module or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer
memory are being written to the flash ROM in the intelligent function module. Doing so will make the
data in the flash ROM card undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to
the flash ROM again. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
● Note that the whole system may not be reset by the RUN/STOP/RESET switch when the CPU module
or intelligent function module detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis.
In such cases, turn the power off and on again.

6
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling
and disposal of your device.

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in
the general specifications of the User's Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module by using dedicated
packaging boxes and shock-absorbing palettes. Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC. After
transportation, verify operation of the PLC and check for damage of the mounting part, etc.

7
 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation, safe use and
operation of the FX5-ENET Ethernet module of MELSEC iQ-F series.
It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. Store this manual in a safe place so that you can
read it whenever necessary.
Always forward it to the end user.

Regarding use of this product

• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been designed or
manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine or passenger
movement vehicles, consult Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product where major
accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.

Note
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical engineer who is
qualified and trained in the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or use, please consult the nearest
Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Mitsubishi Electric will not accept responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed, without a notice, for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you notice a doubtful
point, an error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative. When doing so, please provide the
manual number given at the end of this manual.

8
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 15

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS 17
2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

CHAPTER 3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 22

CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION LIST 24

4.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2 General-purpose Ethernet Communication Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
E-mail function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DNS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
MQTT communication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 61

5.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Number of link points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.2 General-purpose Ethernet Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.3 Applicable Engineering Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

CHAPTER 6 WIRING 64
6.1 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.2 Wiring Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.3 Wiring Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 68

7.1 Procedure for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.2 Required Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.3 Basic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Own Node Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operational Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CC-Link IEF Basic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BACnet function setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
External Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.4 Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

9
 DNS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Simple CPU communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E-mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
MQTT communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.5 Starting Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

CHAPTER 8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL 85

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Server Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Client Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Checking the software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 93
9.1 Interlock Programs of Cyclic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Program using labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Program using buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 96
10.1 Checking with LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.2 Checking the Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Module diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Ethernet diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Checking the buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Event history function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.3 Checking the Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
10.4 Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.6 List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Module error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Ethernet communication error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10.7 List of Event Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

APPENDIX 132
Appendix 1 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Appendix 2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Certification of UL, cUL standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Compliance with EU Directive (CE marking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Requirement for compliance with EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Caution for compliance with EU Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Compliance with UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Appendix 3 Module Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
List of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Details of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Appendix 5 Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Transmission delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

10
Appendix 6 Software Licenses and Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Appendix 7 Added and Changed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

INDEX 172

REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

CONTENTS

11
 RELEVANT MANUALS
Manual name <manual number> Description
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware) Describes the details of hardware of the CPU module, including
<SH-082452ENG> performance specifications, wiring, installation, and maintenance.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Application) Describes the basic knowledge required for program design, functions of
<JY997D55401> the CPU module, devices/labels, and parameters.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Program Design) Describes the specifications of ladder, ST, FBD/LD, and SFC programs, and
<JY997D55701> labels.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Instructions, Standard Functions/ Describes the specifications of instructions and functions that can be used
Function Blocks) in programs.
<JY997D55801>
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication) Describes the communication function of the built-in CPU module and the
<SH-082625ENG> Ethernet module.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Ethernet Module User's Manual Describes the FX5-ENET.
<SH-082026ENG> (This manual)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet Reference Manual BACnet functions of the Ethernet module.
<SH-082218ENG>
GX Works3 Operating Manual Describes the system configuration, parameter settings, and online
<SH-081215ENG> operations of GX Works3.

TERMS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.
Terms Description
Broker An MQTT server that mediates messages (MQTT broker)
Cyclic transmission A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link
devices on CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Disconnection A process of stopping data link if a data link error occurs.
Engineering tool The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers
Link device A device (RX, RY, RWr, or RWw) in a CPU module for the purpose of communicating with remote stations
Link refresh Automatic data transfer between a user device and a link device.
Link scan (link scan time) The master station of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic sends requests to all remote stations. After receiving
responses from all the remote stations, the master station sends next requests. The time taken from when
requests are sent to when the next requests are started to send by the master station.
Master station A station that controls the entire CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. Only one master station can be used in a
network.
Message Data to be exchanged between the sender (publisher) and receiver (subscriber)
Publish/Subscribe message exchange model A protocol capable of one-to-many asynchronous communications
The sender of a message is called a publisher, the receiver is called a subscriber, and an entity playing an
intermediate role is called a broker.
The term "publish" means "send", and "subscribe" means "receive".
QoS Service quality to be provided on the network
QoS is classified into 0 to 2. The larger number indicates better quality and slower transfer speed.
RAS An abbreviation for Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability. This term refers to usability of automated
equipment.
Remote input (RX) Bit data input from a remote station to the master station
Remote output (RY) Bit data output from the master station to a remote station
Remote register (RWr) Word data input from a remote station to the master station
Remote register (RWw) Word data output from the master station to a remote station
Remote station A station that performs cyclic transmission with the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. I/O
signals in units of bits and I/O data in units of words are exchanged.
Retain This term refers to whether to save the latest message for each topic.
If a message could not be sent due to reasons such as client disconnection, the latest message is
delivered when the connection is established again.
Return A process of restarting data link when a station recovers from an error.

12
Terms Description
Topic A key to be used for messaging
In the topic hierarchy, a slash (/) is regarded as a delimiter. For example, when multiple sensors send their
individual information to the topic, the messages can be appropriately organized according to their
installation location and device name.
Will This function sends a Will message with a specified Will topic name to subscribers when the publisher is
disconnected and the server communications are disabled.
If any unexpected disconnection or such an event occurs, subscribers can judge that the publisher is
disconnected.

13
 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
Generic term/abbreviation Description
Battery Different name for FX3U-32BL
Ethernet module Different name for FX5-ENET
Extension module A generic term for the FX5 extension module, FX3 extension module, and extension module (extension
cable type and extension connector type)
FX5U CPU module A generic term for FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS, FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-64MT/ES,
FX5U-64MT/ESS, FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MT/
DS, FX5U-32MT/DSS, FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MT/DS, FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-80MR/DS, FX5U-
80MT/DS, and FX5U-80MT/DSS
FX5UC CPU module A generic term for FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-32MT/DSS, FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-
96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS, and FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS
FX5UJ CPU module A generic term for FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS, FX5UJ-24MR/DS, FX5UJ-
24MT/DS, FX5UJ-24MT/DSS, FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS, FX5UJ-40MR/DS,
FX5UJ-40MT/DS, FX5UJ-40MT/DSS, FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS, FX5UJ-
60MR/DS, FX5UJ-60MT/DS, and FX5UJ-60MT/DSS
GX Works3 Generic product name for the product model SWnDND-GXW3 (where n represents the version)
Intelligent function module A generic term for FX5 intelligent function modules and FX3 intelligent function modules
Peripheral A generic term for engineering tools and GOTs
SD memory card A generic term for NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD, L1MEM-
2GBSD, and L1MEM-4GBSD SD memory cards
An abbreviation for Secure Digital Memory Card. Device that stores data using flash memory.

14
1 OUTLINE
1
FX5-ENET Ethernet module (hereinafter referred to as FX5-ENET) is an intelligent function module for connecting a CPU
module to a CC-Link IE Field Network Basic and general-purpose Ethernet.

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is a factory automation network using the standard Ethernet.
Data is periodically communicated between the master station and remote stations using link devices (cyclic transmission).

(2)

(1) (3) (3) (3)

192.168.3.39 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.3

Device RX, RWr RX, RWr

RX, RWr

RX, RWr
Link
refresh

Link
scan

Device RY, RWw RY, RWw

RY, RWw

RY, RWw
Link
refresh

(1) FX5-ENET (master station)

(2) Hub
(3) External device (remote station)

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic can be used with other Ethernet protocols.

Precautions
The link scan time of cyclic transmission is increased by executing following functions:
• Ethernet functions such as socket communication and communication via SLMP
• Communications with other Ethernet devices on the same line
Use the Ethernet function above or other Ethernet devices so that the system being used is not affected.

1 OUTLINE
15
 General-purpose Ethernet communication
The module can be connected with a host system, such as a personal computer, by using the communication protocol TCP/
UDP.
(1) (3) (1)

(2)

(4) (4)

(1) FX5-ENET
(2) Hub
(3) CPU module
(4) External device (personal computer)

1 OUTLINE
16
2 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the FX5-ENET specifications.

2.1 General Specifications 2

The items other than the following are equivalent to those of the CPU module.
For the general specification, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
Items Specifications
Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute Between all terminals and ground terminal
Insulation resistance 10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance
tester

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

The following table lists the power supply specifications.
Items Specifications
Internal power supply Power supply voltage 24VDC
Current consumption 110mA

2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 General Specifications 17
 2.3 Performance Specifications
The following table lists the performance specifications.
Items Specifications
CC-Link IE Field Station type Master station
Network Basic
Maximum number of connectable stations*1 32
Number of stations occupied by a remote station 1 to 4
Maximum number of link points per network RX 2048
RY 2048
RWr 1024
RWw 1024
Maximum number of link points per Master RX 2048
station station
RY 2048
RWr 1024
RWw 1024
Remote RX 64/128/192/256
station*2
RY 64/128/192/256
RWr 32/64/96/128
RWw 32/64/96/128
UDP port number used in the cyclic transmission 61450
UDP port number used in the automatic detection of Master station: An unused port number is assigned automatically.
connected device Remote station: 61451
Transmission Data transmission speed 100Mbps
specifications Interface RJ45 connector
Maximum station-to-station distance 100m
Overall cable distance Depends on the system configuration
Number of cascade 100BASE-TX For the number of the connectable stages when using a switching hub,
connections check with the manufacturer of the switching hub used.
Network topology Star topology
Hub*3 Hubs with 100BASE-TX ports*4 can be used.
Connection cable*5 100BASE-TX Ethernet cable of category 5 or higher (STP cable)
General- Transmission Data transmission speed 100/10Mbps
purpose specifications
Communication mode Full-duplex or half-duplex*3
Ethernet
communication Transmission method Base band
Interface RJ45 connector
Maximum segment length 100m (length between hub and node)*6
Number of cascade 100BASE-TX 2 levels maximum*7
connections
10BASE-T 4 levels maximum*7
Protocol type*8 MELSOFT connection, SLMP server (3E/1E frame), socket communication,
simple CPU communication, BACnet/IP, MQTT, SMTP client
Number of connections Total of 32 connections*9
(Up to 32 external devices can access one FX5-ENET module at the same
time.)
Hub*3 Hubs with 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T ports*10 can be used.
*5
Connection cable 100BASE-TX Ethernet cable of category 5 or higher (STP cable)
10BASE-T Ethernet cable of category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cable)
Number of ports 2*11
Number of occupied I/O points 8 points
Applicable CPU module • FX5UJ CPU module (From the first)
• FX5U CPU module (Ver. 1.110 or later)
• FX5UC CPU module *12 (Ver. 1.110 or later)
Applicable engineering tool GX Works3 • FX5UJ CPU module: GX Works3 (Ver. 1.060N or later)
• FX5U/FX5UC CPU module: GX Works3 (Ver. 1.050C or later)
Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET Ver. 1.00A or later
Number of connectable modules 1

2 SPECIFICATIONS
18 2.3 Performance Specifications
*1 Maximum number of connected remote stations that FX5-ENET (master station) can manage.
*2 Value for 1-station occupation, 2-station occupation, 3-station occupation, or 4-station occupation.
*3 IEEE802.3x flow control is not supported.
*4 The ports must comply with the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX standards.
*5 A straight/cross cable can be used.
*6 For maximum segment length (length between hubs), consult the manufacturer of the hub used.
*7 This number applies when a repeater hub is used. When using a switching hub, check the number of cascaded stages with the
manufacturer of the hub to be used. 2
*8 For the versions compatible with each protocol, refer to Page 171 Added and Changed Functions.
*9 The first device for MELSOFT connection is not included in the number of connections. (The second and the following devices are
included.)
The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is not included in the number of connections.
*10 The ports must comply with the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX or IEEE802.3 10BASE-T standards.
*11 Since the IP address is shared by two ports, only one address can be set.
*12 FX5-CNV-IFC or FX5-C1PS-5V is necessary to connect FX5-ENET to the FX5UC CPU module.

• If the destination device of the FX5-ENET does not respond due to power off or other reasons, Ethernet
communication of the FX5-ENET may get delayed by up to 500ms.
• In the case of general-purpose Ethernet communication, when FX5-ENET is connected with a hub, it
distinguishes between 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T and between full-duplex and half-duplex
communication modes according to the hub. Set the hub to half-duplex mode if the hub does not have the
auto-negotiation function.

Precautions
The operation of the following connections is not guaranteed. Check the operation before using the module.
• Connection using internet (general public line) (Internet-access service offered by an Internet service provider or a
telecommunications carrier)
• Connection using firewall device(s)
• Connection using broadband router(s)
• Connection using wireless LAN

2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.3 Performance Specifications 19
 2.4 Part Names
This chapter describes the names of each part of the FX5-ENET.
[4] 2-4.5 mounting holes [10]

[5]
[3]

[6]

[7] [11]

[2] [8]
[9]

[1]
[12]

[13]

No. Name Description

[1] External ground terminal Connect an external ground. (Spring clamp terminal block)
[2] Link status display LEDs Displays the link status of module. ( Page 21 LED display)
[3] Extension cable Cable for connecting the module when adding the FX5-ENET.
[4] Direct mounting hole Screw holes (2-4.5, mounting screw: M4 screw) for direct installation
[5] Network status display LEDs Displays the network status. ( Page 21 LED display)
[6] Operation status display LEDs Refer to Page 21 LED display.
[7] Extension connector (for next module) Connector for connecting the extension cable of an extension module.
[8] Modular jack for P1 (RJ-45) (with cap) A port 1 connector for Ethernet network. Connect an Ethernet cable.
[9] Modular jack for P2 (RJ-45) (with cap) A port 2 connector for Ethernet network. Connect an Ethernet cable.
[10] Name plate The product model name, manufacturer's serial number etc. are shown.
[11] DIN rail mounting groove The module can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35mm wide).
[12] DIN rail mounting hook Hook for mounting the module on a DIN rail of DIN46277 (35mm wide).
[13] Pullout tab They are used when drawing out an extension cable.

2 SPECIFICATIONS
20 2.4 Part Names
LED display
The following table lists the LED display.
LED display LED color Description
D LINK Green Indicates the operating status of the remote station.
• On: Communicating with one or more remote stations
• Off: All stations error (Not communicating with any remote station)
2
POWER Green Indicates the power supply status.
• On: Power on
• Off: Power off or module failure
RUN Green Indicates the operating status.
• On: Normal operation
• Off: Error
ERROR Red Indicates the module error status.
• On: Minor error or major error
• Flashing: Moderate error or major error
• Off: Normal operation
P1 SPEED Green Indicates the transmission speed of P1.
• On: Link-up (100Mbps)
• Off: Link-up (10Mbps)
SD/RD Green Indicates the data sending/receiving status of P1.
• On or flashing: Data being sent or received
• Off: Data not being sent or received
P2 SPEED Green Indicates the transmission speed of P2.
• On: Link-up (100Mbps)
• Off: Link-up (10Mbps)
SD/RD Green Indicates the data sending/receiving status of P2.
• On or flashing: Data being sent or received
• Off: Data not being sent or received

2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4 Part Names 21
 3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION
This chapter describes the procedures before operation.

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

1. Checking the specifications of the FX5-ENET
Check the specifications of the FX5-ENET. ( Page 17 SPECIFICATIONS)

2. Installation of the FX5-ENET

Connect the FX5-ENET to the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
3. Configuring a network
Configure a network and set parameters which are required for start-up.
• Wiring ( Page 64 WIRING)
• Parameter setting ( Page 68 PARAMETER SETTINGS)
4. Network diagnostics
Check the status of a network by executing the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics. ( Page 104 CC-Link IE Field
Network Basic Diagnostics)
5. Programming
Create a program. ( Page 93 PROGRAMMING)
6. Check the communication status
Check the communication status of FX5-ENET. ( Page 97 Checking the Module Status)

General-purpose Ethernet communication

1. Checking the specifications of the FX5-ENET
Check the specifications of the FX5-ENET. ( Page 17 SPECIFICATIONS)

2. Installation of the FX5-ENET

Connect the FX5-ENET to the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
3. Configuring a network
Configure a network and set parameters which are required for start-up.
• Wiring ( Page 64 WIRING)
• Parameter setting ( Page 68 PARAMETER SETTINGS)
In the following steps, refer to the following manual for each function.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet Reference Manual

3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

22
MEMO

3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

23
 4 FUNCTION LIST
The following table lists the function available for the FX5-ENET.

4.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

For details on function of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, refer to  CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual.

Cyclic transmission
Function Description
Data communication using link devices Periodically performs data communication between the master station and remote stations using link devices
(RX/RY/RWr/RWw) (RX/RY/RWr/RWw).
Link refresh Automatically transfers data between devices and link devices of the master station.
Cyclic data integrity assurance Assures cyclic data integrity in station-based units or 32 bit-based units.
Group number setting Divides remote stations into groups by setting a group number to each remote station and each of groups
performs the cyclic transmission. By organizing groups separating remote stations with shorter response
processing time from ones with longer response processing time, the differences of the reference response times
of each remote station does not badly affect the cyclic transmission.
Constant link scan Maintains constant 1-link scan time for each group.

RAS
Function Description
Remote station disconnection The corresponding remote station is disconnected if no response is returned within the timeout time or number of
times set with the Remote station disconnect detected setting, or if an abnormal response or disconnection
request is received from the remote station.
Automatic return Automatically returns a disconnected station to the network and restarts the data link when the station returns to
normal.

4.2 General-purpose Ethernet Communication

Functions
For details on general-purpose Ethernet communication functions, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet Reference Manual
Function Description
Direct connection with MELSOFT FX5-ENET and MELSOFT product (GX Works3, etc.) are connected by single Ethernet cable without using a
hub.
Communication is done by simply specifying the connection destination; setting the IP address is not required.
MELSOFT connection Communication with MELSOFT products (GX Works3, etc.) is performed via FX5-ENET.
Connected module search function Searches for FX5-ENET connected with personal computer using GX Works3 within the same hub. Acquires IP
address by selecting from search results list.
MELSOFT diagnosis function Diagnoses Ethernet port of CPU module and FX5-ENET from GX Works3. (Ethernet diagnostics)
SLMP communication function Reads and writes PLC data from the external devices.
Socket communication function By using socket communication instructions, any data can be transferred from and to the external devices
connected through Ethernet using TCP or UDP.
IP filter function Identifies the IP address of the access source to limit access to the FX5-ENET.
Simple CPU communication function Allows data communications between specified devices at the specified timing just by doing simple parameter
settings from an engineering tool for the FX5-ENET.
IP address change function The IP address of FX5-ENET can be changed by operating peripherals without using GX Works3.
BACnet function Uses a PLC system as a BACnet device.

4 FUNCTION LIST
24 4.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
4.3 Other Functions
The following shows other functions.
Function Description Reference
E-mail function This function enables e-mails to be sent via mail servers over networks to personal Page 26
computers or smartphones in remote locations.
DNS settings Specify the IP address of the DNS server when the host name is to be set as a domain Page 41
name in the e-mail function or the MQTT communication function.
MQTT communication function This function enables information (for example, input from sensors) collected on a Page 46
programmable controller to be published (sent) to an MQTT broker (on the cloud or on a
local network) and such information to be subscribed (received) from the MQTT broker.
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics Checks the status of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. Page 104
Hardware test Performs hardware tests (RAM and ROM) of FX5-ENET. Page 106 4
Ethernet diagnostics Diagnoses the Ethernet port from GX Works3. Page 99
Event history function Collects errors from FX5-ENET, and stores them as event information into the CPU Page 103
module.
Firmware update function Updates the firmware version of FX5-ENET. MELSEC iQ-F
FX5 User's Manual
(Application)

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 25
 E-mail function

Function overview
This function enables e-mails to be sent via mail servers over networks to personal computers or smartphones in remote
locations.
The programmable controller sends e-mails by using a module function block in a ladder program.
When an error occurs in the Ethernet module, this function can send a notification with device data attached as detailed
information to the mail addresses of users.
This function supports the TLS encryption function and enables connection to a free mail server.

Free e-mail server

Supporting secure
communications with
TLS encryption

Internet

Personal computer or smartphone Ethernet module

■E-mail flow
The following figure shows the flow of an e-mail from being sent to being received by an external device.

Programmable Ethernet module

controller

E-mail server E-mail server Personal computer

Sending
an e-mail

Sending (1) (2) (3)

an e-mail

(1) The Ethernet module sends the e-mail to the outgoing mail server.
(2) The outgoing mail server sends the e-mail to the incoming mail server of the send destination device.
(3) The personal computer uses the e-mail software to receive e-mail.

The e-mail function enables the programmable controller to create an e-mail message whose body or attachment contains the
device data of a station in which the Ethernet module is mounted, and send the message to personal computers,
smartphones, or other external devices. The attachment is used to send device or other data that is converted and encoded
into binary, ASCII, or CSV (ASCII) data format.
The subject and message body are used to send ASCII or UTF-16 data (string data) created with a sequence program.
(When UTF-16 data is selected, it is converted to UTF-8 by the intelligent function module.)

4 FUNCTION LIST
26 4.3 Other Functions
 Message to be sent by the programmable controller Remarks
Subject ASCII: Maximum 128 characters
Unicode: Maximum 64 characters
Attachment Binary format Maximum 32768 bytes
Binary to ASCII conversion
Binary to CSV conversion
Message body Specified with ASCII or Unicode ASCII: Maximum 1024 characters
data Unicode: Maximum 512 characters (or 513 characters when including a NULL character
that is added to the end of the message body)

■Ethernet module data conversion method

The following shows how data is converted by the Ethernet module.
An e-mail created by a user with a ladder program using a module function block is sent to the mail server after the following
4
conversion processing is performed by the Ethernet module.
• Subject: UTF-16 to UTF-8 (No conversion for ASCII)
• Message body: UTF-16 to UTF-8 (No conversion for ASCII)
• Attachment: Binary to binary, ASCII, or CSV
Divided send Ethernet Batch send
Module FB E-mail server
module

Sending an e-mail

Subject Subject
ASCII/Unicode (UTF-16) data ASCII/Unicode (UTF-8) data
Creating a message
in ASCII/Unicode
Conversion
(UTF-16)
Text Text
ASCII/Unicode (UTF-16) data Reception
ASCII/Unicode (UTF-8) data

Specifying an Attachment Attachment

attachment (Binary file) (Binary file/ASCII/CSV)

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 27
 System configuration
In an environment where the Internet is available, e-mails can be sent. (Since the mail server is responsible for sending e-
mails, the Ethernet module does not directly send e-mails to the Internet.)
Set each setting value of e-mail for Ethernet modules, personal computers, and other devices according to the instructions by
the system administrator.
To set the parameters of the Ethernet module to use the e-mail function, use the engineering tools or sequence programs.

■When the SMTP server is in the office

Internet
(general public line)

Internet Internet
service provider service provider

Router Ethernet module access range Router

Ethernet Ethernet

Proxy DNS SMTP/POP3 Proxy DNS SMTP/POP3

server server (e-mail server) server server (e-mail server)

Ethernet

External device Ethernet module External device

Sending side Receiving side

4 FUNCTION LIST
28 4.3 Other Functions
■When the SMTP server is outside the office

Internet
(general public line)

Ethernet module access range

Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet

service provider service provider service provider service provider service provider
4

DNS SMTP/POP3 SMTP/POP3

server (e-mail server) (e-mail server)
Router Router

Ethernet

External device Ethernet module External device

Sending side Receiving side

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 29
 E-mail specifications
The following lists the e-mail specifications.
Item Specifications
Data size Attachment*1 32768 bytes  1
Message body When Unicode is selected: 512 characters  1, when ASCII is selected: 1024 characters  1
Subject When Unicode is selected: 64 characters  1, when ASCII is selected: 128 characters  1
Data transfer method Sending: The message body and attachment are sent.
Subject US-ASCII format or Unicode (UTF-8)
Attachment format MIME format
MIME Version 1.0
Attachment data format Binary, ASCII, or CSV can be selected.
File name: binary (*.bin), ASCII (*.asc), and CSV (ASCII) (*.csv)
Splitting of an attachment Not allowed (Only one file can be sent.)
Sending (encoding) Subject: Base64/7 bits
Message body: Base64/7 bits
Attachment: Base64
Encryption Available (Available for TLS1.3 and TLS1.2)
Compression None
Communication with the mail server SMTP Port number No authentication: 25 (Initial value)
SMTPS: 465
Any port (1 to 65534) can be specified.
Authentication method • No authentication (supported on port 25)
• SMTP-AUTH (PLAIN, LOGIN, or CRAM-MD5) (supported on port 465)

*1 A file (such as logging data) in the CPU module or SD card cannot be attached. Attachment data must be generated with a program.

• This e-mail function supports encryption (TLS1.3 and TLS1.2). To enable/disable TLS, select an appropriate
protocol in the external device configuration. When the TLS setting is disabled, TCP connection is enabled.
(Page 79 External Device Configuration)
• For TCP connection, authentication information may be intercepted. Therefore, encrypted communication is
recommended.
• When adding a mail server device in the external device configuration, set the port number of host station.
(Page 79 External Device Configuration)

■Encryption algorythms used in TLS communications

The following table lists the encryption algorythms used in TLS communications.
Function name Algorithm
SSL/TLS support (client and server) TLS 1.2
TLS 1.3
DTLS support (client and server) None
Hash function support SHA-1
SHA-256
SHA-384
SHA-512
Encryption with block, stream, and authentication AES CBC
GCM
GMAC
Public-key cryptography RSA
ECDHE-ECDSA
ECDHE-RSA
Curve type of ECC SECP
SECPR2
SECPR3

4 FUNCTION LIST
30 4.3 Other Functions
Function name Algorithm
Key length of ECC 256
384
PSK (pre-shared key) None

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 31
 Setting procedure
To use the e-mail function, use GX Works3 to set the module parameters. To verify the server certificate, configure additional
settings with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
Note that the module parameters can be set from the buffer memory as well. If settings are configured with both Certificate
Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET and the buffer memory, priority is given to the settings configured with the buffer memory.* 1
*1 Check 'E-mail setting change function enable flag' (Un\G4374) to find out which setting is being used.

GX Works3 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

Create a new project on GX Works3

and add an Ethernet module.

Set module parameters.

Create a program to send e-mails

using module FBs.

Write the project created on GX Works3

to a CPU module. Set the reliable certificate.
(Ethernet port on the CPU module)

Write the certificate setting to

Are certificates sent from Yes
the Ethernet module.
the server verified? (Ethernet port on the Ethernet module)

No

Setting completion

When creating a program that sends e-mail messages using a module function block, refer to the following
manual.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, CC-Link IE Function Block Reference

■Configuring settings with GX Works3

Configure settings for sending e-mails in "Mail Function Setting" of GX Works3. ( Page 82 E-mail settings)

■Configuring settings with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

This function is configured with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. (Page 85 Certificate Configuration Tool for
FX5-ENET)
For Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, only the port of the Ethernet module can be connected.

For how to obtain Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, refer to the following.
Page 63 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

4 FUNCTION LIST
32 4.3 Other Functions
Sending e-mails
The following figure shows the flow of sending an e-mail message consisting of the body and attachment.

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module SMTP server

(ladder program)

(1)

(2)

CONNECT (user name password)

Return
4
(3)

Return (OK)

(4)

Return
(5)

(1) The FX5 CPU module (ladder program) executes the module function block (Mail_Send).
(2) The Ethernet module sends the e-mail to the SMTP server.
(3) The Ethernet module establishes a TLS/TCP session.
(4) The Ethernet module disconnects the TLS/TCP session.
(5) The module function block (Mail_Send) returns the result (Completed successfully or Completed with an error) to the FX5 CPU module (ladder program).

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 33
 Attachment
For attachments, the data format can be selected as either ASCII code (ASCII format or CSV format) or binary code (binary
format).
The following figure shows what is sent for each data format (binary, ASCII, or CSV) when the Ethernet module sends the
values of D0 to D100, from the start address D0, as an attachment.
Ethernet module When an attachment is
a binary format file
D100 D1 D0
External device

D0 1234H 9AH BCH 56H 78H 12H 34H

D1 5678H When an attachment is

an ASCII format file
D100 D1 D0

Conversion to
ASCII format "C" "B" "A" "9" "8" "7" "6" "5" "4" "3" "2" "1"
from binary format
·
When an attachment is
a CSV format file
D100 D1 D0

Conversion to
D100 9ABCH CSV format "C" "B" "A" "9" , , "8" "7" "6" "5" , "4" "3" "2" "1"
from binary format

■Structure of data in CSV format

Data in CSV format can be used for data management on a cell basis by Excel.
The following shows data in CSV format handled by the Ethernet module.
• Each word of binary data (16 bits) is converted into a 4-digit ASCII code expressed in hexadecimal (4 bytes of ASCII code).
• When handling multiple words of data, a comma is inserted after every 1 word (4 bytes of ASCII data).
• Besides the above data conversion and insertion, CR (Code: 0DH) and LF (Code: 0AH) are inserted after every 8 words of
data.
The target data are sent in the following order.

D0 , D1 , D2 , D7 [CR+LF]

D8 , D9 , D10 , D15 [CR+LF]

D16 , D17 , D18 , D23 [CR+LF]

D24 , D25 , D26 [CR+LF]

Eight devices
(in a unit of eight words)

4 FUNCTION LIST
34 4.3 Other Functions
E-mail setting change function
This function changes the e-mail settings of the Ethernet module by setting information required for sending e-mail, such as
account information, from a peripheral to the buffer memory and turning on 'E-mail setting storage area write request'
(Un\G4370).
Information such as the sender e-mail address of the Ethernet module can be changed without the engineering tool.
When the e-mail setting change function is used, instead of the e-mail settings configured with the module parameters in the
engineering tool, information such as the sender e-mail address stored in the e-mail setting storage area is set to the Ethernet
module.* 1
*1 Check 'E-mail setting change function enable flag' (Un\G4374) to find out which settings are being used.
In addition, turning on 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372) can enable the e-mail settings configured with
the module parameters in the engineering tool to become active again.
4
(1)
(2)
Un\G4173 TLS setting
Un\G4174
Sender
e-mail address Un\G4173 TLS setting Un\G4173 TLS setting
Un\G4205
Un\G4174
Un\G4206 Sender Sender
Sender name e-mail address e-mail address
Un\G4205
Un\G4206 Sender name Sender name

Un\G4269
Turn on
Un\G4370.
Un\G4269
Ethernet communications/
Serial communications
(RS-485/422/232)
CPU module and
Ethernet module
Peripheral

(3)

Un\G4173 TLS setting

Un\G4174
Sender
e-mail address
Un\G4205
Un\G4206
Sender name

Un\G4269

(1) Use the device write operation to store information such as the sender e-mail address in the buffer memory.
(2) Turn on 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370), which causes the information such as the sender e-mail address in the buffer memory to be
stored in the e-mail setting storage area.
(3) The e-mail settings stored in the e-mail setting storage area are used for operation.

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 35
 ■E-mail settings that are set to the Ethernet module
When the e-mail setting change function is used, instead of the e-mail settings configured with the module parameters in the
engineering tool, the e-mail settings stored in the e-mail setting storage area are set to the Ethernet module.

Ex.
The following figure shows a case where the sender e-mail address and sender name are set from the e-mail setting storage
area to the Ethernet module, resulting in the sender e-mail address being set to [email protected] and the sender name to
DEF.
When the Ethernet module is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset, or when the e-mail settings are stored in the e-
mail setting storage area, the e-mail settings in the e-mail setting storage area are set to the Ethernet module. If the settings
are not stored in the e-mail setting storage area, the e-mail settings configured with the module parameters in the engineering
tool are set to the Ethernet module.

Module parameter

Sender e-mail address [email protected]

Sender name ABC

Ethernet module

Sender e-mail address [email protected]

Sender name DEF

E-mail setting storage area

Values in the e-mail setting storage areas are set.

Sender e-mail address [email protected]

Sender name DEF

4 FUNCTION LIST
36 4.3 Other Functions
■Procedure for writing data to the e-mail setting storage area
The following describes the procedure for writing data to the e-mail setting storage area to change the e-mail settings in the
Ethernet module.

1. Store desired data, such as a new sender e-mail address, in E-mail send function (Un\G4173 to Un\G4369).

2. Write 1 or 2 to 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370).

3. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory address Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G4371.b0 E-mail setting storage area write completed On On
Un\G4371.b1 E-mail setting storage area write error Off On
Un\G4375 E-mail setting storage area write error code  Error code

4. Check that 'E-mail setting change function enable flag' (Un\G4374) turns on. 4
5. Refer to E-mail send function (Un\G4173 to Un\G4369) to check the information such as the sender e-mail address set in
the Ethernet module.* 1
*1 The value of 'Password' (Un\G4337 to Un\G4368) cannot be seen because the value in the buffer memory area is cleared when the e-
mail setting storage area write processing is completed successfully.

Immediately after 1 or 2 is written to 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370), if the values
stored in the e-mail setting storage area are valid, the stored e-mail settings are set as the e-mail settings for
the Ethernet module.
If the stored values are invalid or no values are stored, the values configured with the module parameters are
set as the e-mail settings for the Ethernet module.
If valid values are already stored in the e-mail setting storage area, they are set as the e-mail settings as-is.
If the write processing for the e-mail setting storage area is not completed successfully, the error code
(1930H) is stored in 'E-mail setting storage area write error code' (Un\G4375).

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 37
 ■Operation to write to the e-mail setting storage area
Store desired data, such as a new sender e-mail address, in E-mail send function (Un\G4173 to Un\G4369) and turn 'E-mail
setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) from 0 to 1 or from 0 to 2. This causes the data to be written to the e-mail
setting storage area.
The difference in setting values of 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) is as follows.
• 0 to 1: Include the writing of 'Password' (Un\G4337 to Un\G4368).
• 0 to 2: Do not include the writing of 'Password' (Un\G4337 to Un\G4368).
Buffer memory E-mail setting storage area

Un\G4173 TLS setting TLS setting

Un\G4174 Sender e-mail address Sender e-mail address

Un\G4205
Un\G4206 Sender name*1 Sender name*1

Un\G4269
Un\G4270 SMTP server specification method SMTP server specification method
Un\G4271 SMTP server name/IP address SMTP server name/IP address

Writing data
Un\G4302
Un\G4303 SMTP port number SMTP port number
Un\G4304 Authentication method Authentication method
Un\G4305 User name User name

Un\G4336
Un\G4337 Password Password*2

Un\G4368
Un\G4369 Certificate verification setting Certificate verification setting

The following table lists data items to be written into the e-mail setting storage area.
Item name Description
TLS setting Specifies whether to enable or disable the TLS setting.
When the TLS setting is disabled, TCP connection is enabled.
Sender e-mail address Specifies the e-mail address of the sender.
Sender name*1 Specifies the sender name.
SMTP server specification method Specifies whether to use a server name or IP address to specify the SMTP
server.
SMTP server name / IP address Specifies the server name in ASCII format when the SMTP server
specification method is set to server name.
Specifies the IP address in binary code when the SMTP server specification
method is set to IP address.
SMTP port number Specifies the SMTP server port number.
Authentication method Specifies the SMTP server authentication method.
User name Specifies the user name for SMTP server authentication.
Password*2 Specifies the password for SMTP server authentication.
Certificate verification setting*3 Specifies whether to verify certificates received from the server.

*1 The sender name can be omitted.

*2 Data can be written only when 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) is turned from 0 to 1.
*3 If 'Certificate verification setting' (Un\G4369) is enabled, settings with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET are required.

4 FUNCTION LIST
38 4.3 Other Functions
■Operation to clear the e-mail setting storage area
Turn 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372) from 0 to 1. This causes the e-mail setting storage area to be
cleared, which means that the e-mail setting change function becomes disabled.
When the e-mail setting storage area is cleared, the e-mail settings configured with the module parameters will be used.

Ex.
The following figure shows a case where the sender e-mail address and sender name are set from the module parameters to
the Ethernet module, resulting in the sender e-mail address being set to [email protected] and the sender name to ABC.
In addition, even when the Ethernet module is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset, the e-mail settings stored in
the module parameters are set to the Ethernet module.

Module parameter

Sender e-mail address [email protected]

4
Sender name ABC
Ethernet module

Sender e-mail address [email protected]

Sender name ABC

E-mail setting storage area

Values in the module parameters are set.

Sender e-mail address 0: CLEAR

Sender name

■Procedure for clearing the e-mail setting storage area

The following describes the procedure for clearing the e-mail setting storage area.

1. Write 1 to 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372).

2. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory address Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G4373.b0 E-mail setting storage area clear completed On On
Un\G4373.b1 E-mail setting storage area clear error Off On
Un\G4376 E-mail setting storage area clear error code  Error code

3. Check that 'E-mail setting change function enable flag' (Un\G4374) turns off.

4. Check that the e-mail setting values configured with the module parameters are stored in E-mail send function
(Un\G4173 to Un\G4369).

Immediately after 1 is written to 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372), the values configured
with the module parameters are stored in the buffer memory and set as the e-mail settings for the Ethernet
module.
If the clear processing for the e-mail setting storage area is not completed successfully, the error code
(1931H) is stored in 'E-mail setting storage area clear error code (Un\G4376).

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 39
 Precautions
The following lists the precautions on the e-mail setting change function.
• If e-mail messages are sent consecutively, the SMTP server may not be accessed. If a connection error occurs, send e-
mail messages at large intervals.
• No error code can be identified in some cases, such as where no external device could be found when the Ethernet module
tried to send an e-mail. An error code that can be identified for the e-mail send function is stored in 'Error code' (Un\G4377).
For details on possible error codes, refer to the following.Page 110 List of Error Codes
• Do not send safety-related data because e-mail messages will not be sent if a power-off of the programmable controller
occurs while attempting to send e-mail messages.
• For the minimum time interval of access to the mail server when sending e-mails, check with the system administrator.
Frequent access may be prohibited depending on the security settings of the mail server.
• To avoid being asked to take responsibility for sending e-mail messages to unintended destinations and avoid being
charged for a large amount of money resulting from an unintended amount of data transmission, check the settings of the
module parameters and module function blocks configured in the engineering tool or buffer memory before sending e-mail
messages.
• If e-mail messages cannot be sent in ways other than the instructions in "E-mail settings", check for setting errors in the
network connection, module parameters, and module function blocks. (Page 82 E-mail settings)
• If the NULL code is included in a position other than the end of the message body in the e-mail sending function block, the
error code (1968H) may be generated. Therefore, configure the settings so that the NULL code is not included in a position
other than the end of the message body.
• If a character code not specified in the message body is included in the e-mail sending function block, the appearance of
the message body data may be corrupted at the e-mail destination.

■Power-off and CPU module reset

Do not power off the system or reset the CPU module while writing to or clearing the e-mail setting storage area. Otherwise,
values may not be reflected to the e-mail setting storage area.
Powering off the system or resetting the CPU module is not required after writing to or clearing the e-mail setting storage area.

■E-mail settings configured with the parameters

For the e-mail settings of the Ethernet module, priority is given to the values stored in the e-mail setting storage area over the
values configured with the module parameters.
Whether the e-mail setting change function is enabled can be checked with 'E-mail setting change function enable flag'
(Un\G4374).
To use the e-mail settings configured with the module parameters, clear the e-mail setting storage area.

■Execution timings of write processing and clear processing

When operating 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) or 'E-mail setting storage area clear request'
(Un\G4372) in such a way as turning it on, off, and on or turning it off, on, and off at short intervals, the operation results and
the values in the operation result storage buffer memory may not match. Therefore, if operating an e-mail setting storage area
write request or clear request at short intervals, check in advance that b0 of 'E-mail setting area write completed' (Un\G4371)
or b0 of 'E-mail setting area clear completed' (Un\G4373) has turned on.
If both 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) and 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372) are
turned off and on, the write processing or clear processing may not be executed.

■Failure of writing to or reading from the e-mail setting storage area

If writing to or reading from the e-mail setting storage area fails, the error code (1813H) is stored in the event history, and the
e-mail settings configured with the module parameters are set to the Ethernet module.

■Exclusive control of the e-mail sending process and the e-mail setting change function
Do not perform an operation to execute the e-mail setting change function while the e-mail sending process is in progress.
Similarly, do not send an e-mail while the e-mail setting change function is being executed.
Otherwise, the operation performed later fails with an error (Error code: 1815H).

4 FUNCTION LIST
40 4.3 Other Functions
DNS settings
When the host name is to be set as a domain name in the e-mail function or the MQTT communication function, specify the IP
address of the DNS server to DNS servers 1 to 4 specified by the system administrator.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-ENET]  [Application Setting]  [DNS Settings]

Setting item Description Setting range

DNS server 1 address Set the IP address of DNS server 1. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 2 address Set the IP address of DNS server 2. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 3 address Set the IP address of DNS server 3. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 4 address Set the IP address of DNS server 4. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

• The IP addresses of the DNS servers are set with the module parameters. They can be set from DNS
setting (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397) in the buffer memory as well.
• A DNS server is a server that converts domain names into IP addresses, and the DNS settings are required
to use a domain name to find an SMTP server in the e-mail function or to find an MQTT broker in the MQTT
communication function.
• The DNS settings are used if the e-mail function or the MQTT communication function uses a domain name
to specify a connection destination, and thus, the settings can be omitted if connection destinations are
specified with IP addresses.
• When "To Use or Not to Use DNS Server Settings" is set to "Use", set one or more DNS servers from DNS
servers 1 to 4. If no DNS server is set or if a valid value is not set, the error (C101H) occurs.
• To resolve an IP address from a domain name, search the DNS servers in sequence, starting from DNS
server 1.
• If a valid value is set for DNS server 1 and DNS server 4 each, and no or invalid value is set for DNS server
2 and DNS server 3 each, a search is made in the order of DNS server 1 and DNS server 4. (DNS server 2
and DNS server 3 are not searched.)

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 41
 DNS setting change function
The DNS setting change function changes the DNS settings of the Ethernet module by setting the IP addresses of DNS
servers from a peripheral to the buffer memory and turning on 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398).
The IP addresses of DNS servers can be changed without the engineering tool.
When the DNS setting change function is used, instead of the DNS settings configured with the module parameters in the
engineering tool, the IP addresses of the DNS servers stored in the DNS setting storage area are set to the Ethernet module.
In addition, turning on 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400) can enable the DNS settings configured with the
module parameters in the engineering tool to become active again.

(1)
(2)
Un\G4390
DNS server 1 DNS setting
Un\G4391 address Buffer memory storage area

Un\G4392 Un\G4390
DNS server 2 DNS server 1 DNS server 1
Un\G4393 address Un\G4391 address address

Un\G4394 DNS server 3 Un\G4392 DNS server 2 DNS server 2

Un\G4395 address Un\G4393 address address

Un\G4396 DNS server 4 Un\G4394 DNS server 3 DNS server 3

address Un\G4395 address Turn on address
Un\G4397
Un\G4398.
Un\G4396 DNS server 4 DNS server 4
Ethernet communications/ Un\G4397 address address
Serial communications
(RS-485/422/232)

CPU module and

Ethernet module
Peripheral

(3)
(4)

Un\G4390
DNS server 1
Un\G4391 address

Un\G4392 DNS server 2

Un\G4393 address

Un\G4394 DNS server 3

Un\G4395 address

Un\G4396 DNS server 4

Un\G4397 address

(1) Use the device write operation to store IP addresses of the DNS servers in the buffer memory.
(2) Turn on 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398), which causes the IP addresses of the DNS servers in the buffer memory to be stored in the
DNS setting storage area.
(3) Power off and on the system or reset the CPU module.
(4) The DNS settings stored in the DNS setting storage area are used for operation.

4 FUNCTION LIST
42 4.3 Other Functions
■DNS settings that are set to the Ethernet module
When the DNS setting change function is used, instead of the IP addresses of the DNS servers configured with the module
parameters in the engineering tool, the IP addresses of the DNS servers stored in the DNS setting storage area are set to the
Ethernet module.* 1
*1 Check 'E-mail setting change function enable flag' (Un\G4374) to find out which setting is being used.
Powering off and on the system or resetting the CPU module reflects the IP addresses of the DNS setting storage area to the
Ethernet module. If no DNS settings are stored in the DNS setting storage area, the IP addresses of the DNS servers
configured with the module parameters in the engineering tool are set to the Ethernet module.

Ex.
The following figure shows a case where the IP addresses of DNS servers 1 to 4 are set from the DNS setting storage area to
the Ethernet module, resulting in the IP addresses of DNS servers 1 to 4 being set to 192.0.2.5 to 192.0.2.8.
4
Module parameter

DNS server 1 address 192.0.2.1

DNS server 2 address 192.0.2.2

Ethernet module DNS server 3 address 192.0.2.3

DNS server 1 address 192.0.2.5 DNS server 4 address 192.0.2.4

DNS server 2 address 192.0.2.6

DNS server 3 address 192.0.2.7

DNS server 4 address 192.0.2.8

DNS setting storage area
Values in the DNS setting storage areas are set.

DNS server 1 address 192.0.2.5

DNS server 2 address 192.0.2.6

DNS server 3 address 192.0.2.7

DNS server 4 address 192.0.2.8

■Procedure for writing data to the DNS setting storage area

The following describes the procedure for writing data to the DNS setting storage area to change the DNS settings in the
Ethernet module.
1. Store new IP addresses in the DNS server address areas (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397).
2. Write 1 to 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398).

3. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory address Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G4399.b0 DNS setting storage area write completed On On
Un\G4399.b1 DNS setting storage area write error Off On
Un\G4403 DNS setting storage area write error code  Error code

4. When the write processing is completed successfully, power off and on the system or reset the CPU module.

5. Check the IP addresses of the DNS servers with the DNS server address areas (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397).

If the stored values are invalid or no values are set, the values configured with the module parameters are set
as the DNS settings for the Ethernet module.
If valid values are already stored in the DNS setting storage area, they are set as the DNS settings as-is.
If the write processing for the DNS setting storage area is not completed successfully, the error code (1940H)
is stored in 'DNS setting storage area write error code (Un\G4403).

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 43
 ■Operation to write to the DNS setting storage area
Store the new IP addresses of the DNS servers in the DNS server address areas (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397) and turn 'DNS
setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398) from 0 to 1. This causes the addresses to be written to the DNS server setting
storage area.
Buffer memory DNS setting storage area

Un\G4390
DNS server 1 DNS server 1
Un\G4391 address address

Un\G4392
DNS server 2 DNS server 2
address address
Un\G4393

Un\G4394
DNS server 3 DNS server 3
address Writing data address
Un\G4395

Un\G4396 DNS server 4 DNS server 4

address address
Un\G4397

The following table lists data items to be written into the DNS setting storage area.
Item name Description
DNS server 1 address Set the IP address of DNS server 1.
DNS server 2 address Set the IP address of DNS server 2.
DNS server 3 address Set the IP address of DNS server 3.
DNS server 4 address Set the IP address of DNS server 4.

■Operation to clear the DNS setting storage area

Turn 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400) from 0 to 1 and power off and on the system or reset the CPU
module. This clears the DNS setting storage area (disables the DNS setting change function).

Ex.
The following figure shows a case where the IP addresses of DNS servers 1 to 4 are set from the module parameters to the
Ethernet module, resulting in the IP addresses of DNS servers 1 to 4 being set to 192.0.2.1 to 192.0.2.4.

Module parameter

DNS server 1 address 192.0.2.1

DNS server 2 address 192.0.2.2

Ethernet module DNS server 3 address 192.0.2.3

DNS server 1 address 192.0.2.1 DNS server 4 address 192.0.2.4

DNS server 2 address 192.0.2.2

DNS server 3 address 192.0.2.3

DNS server 4 address 192.0.2.4

DNS setting storage area
Values in the module parameters are set.

DNS server 1 address 0: CLEAR

DNS server 2 address

DNS server 3 address

DNS server 4 address

4 FUNCTION LIST
44 4.3 Other Functions
■Procedure for clearing the DNS setting storage area
The following describes the procedure for clearing the DNS setting storage area.

1. Write 1 to 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400).

2. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory address Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G4401.b0 DNS setting storage area clear completed On On
Un\G4401.b1 DNS setting storage area clear error Off On
Un\G4404 DNS setting storage area clear error code  Error code

3. When the clear processing is completed successfully, power off and on the system or reset the CPU module.

4. Check that the DNS setting values configured with the module parameters are stored in the DNS server address areas
(Un\G4390 to Un\G4397). 4

If the clear processing for the DNS setting storage area is not completed successfully, the error code (1941H)
is stored in 'DNS setting storage area clear error code (Un\G4404).

Precautions
The following lists the precautions on the DNS setting change function.

■Power-off and CPU module reset

Do not power off the system or reset the CPU module while writing to or clearing the DNS setting storage area. Otherwise,
values may not be reflected to the DNS setting storage area.
Powering off the system or resetting the CPU module is not required after checking that 'DNS setting storage area write
completed' (Un\G4399.b0) and 'DNS setting storage area clear completed' (Un\G4401.b0) are turned on.

■DNS settings configured with the parameters

For the DNS settings of the Ethernet module, priority is given to the values in the DNS setting storage area over the values in
the module parameters.
Whether the DNS setting change function is enabled can be checked with 'DNS setting change function enable flag'
(Un\G4402).
To use the DNS settings configured with the module parameters, clear the DNS setting storage area.

■Execution timings of write processing and clear processing

When operating 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398) or 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400)
in such a way as turning it on, off, and on or turning it off, on, and off at short intervals, the operation results and the values in
the operation result storage buffer memory may not match. Therefore, if operating a DNS setting storage area write request or
clear request at short intervals, check in advance that b0 of 'DNS setting area write completed' (Un\G4399) or b0 of 'DNS
setting area clear completed' (Un\G4401) has turned on.
If both 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398) and 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400) are
turned off and on, the write processing or clear processing may not be executed.

■Failure of writing to or reading from the DNS setting storage area

If writing to or reading from the DNS setting storage area fails, the error code (1814H) is stored in the event history, and the
DNS settings configured with the module parameters are set to the Ethernet module.

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 45
 MQTT communication function

Function overview
This function enables information (for example, input from sensors) collected on a programmable controller to be published
(sent) to an MQTT broker (on the cloud or on a local network) and such information to be subscribed (received) from the
MQTT broker.
MQTT is a lightweight, simple protocol and most suitable for devices with limited processing performance or limited
communication bandwidth. Communications become possible under conditions in which the network is unstable or the
devices have low communication performance, such as Machine to Machine (M2M) communication and Internet of Things
(IoT) communication.
MQTT is an OASIS standard communication protocol using a Publish/Subscribe message exchange model.
This product works as a client in MQTT communication and uses module function blocks in ladder programs to publish/
subscribe messages to an MQTT broker. In addition, secure communication encrypted with TLS (MQTTS) is also supported.
MQTT Publisher MQTT Broker MQTT Subscriber
(client) (server) (client)

MQTT gateway
or another device
Cloud

Publish Subscribe Personal computer

or another device

Ethernet module Ethernet module

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Publish input from sensors or other information to an MQTT broker.

(2) MQTT broker on the cloud or on a local network
(3) Subscribe information from an MQTT broker and use the information to enable data logging, output control, and other operations.

4 FUNCTION LIST
46 4.3 Other Functions
System configuration
The following figure shows the basic system configuration when using the MQTT function.
• For TCP connection
(5)

(1) (2) (4)

(4)

(3)
4

(1) FX5U CPU module

(2) FX5-ENET (MQTT client)
(3) Personal computer with GX Works3 and Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET installed
(4) Ethernet switch/router (optional)
(5) MQTT broker

• For TLS connection

(1) (2) (4) (5) (6)

Internet Cloud

(4)

(3)

(1) FX5U CPU module

(2) FX5-ENET (MQTT client)
(3) Personal computer with GX Works3 and Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET installed
(4) Ethernet switch/router (optional)
(5) External network (such as the Internet)
(6) MQTT broker (on the cloud or on a local network)

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 47
 Communication specifications
The following table lists the MQTT communication specifications.
Item Specifications
MQTT function • Connects to the MQTT server (broker).
• Sends messages to the MQTT server as a publisher.
• Receives messages from the MQTT server as a subscriber.
MQTT protocol version V3.1.1
Encrypted communication Available for TLS1.3 and TLS1.2
Key length (client certificate) • 1024 bits
• 2048 bits
Maximum size of Topic • 511 characters (ASCII, excluding NULL character)
• 255 characters (Unicode string, excluding NULL character)*1
Maximum size of a message to be published • 32768 bytes (binary)
• 32767 characters (ASCII, excluding NULL character)
• 16383 characters (Unicode string, excluding NULL character)*1
MQTT server address The IP address or host name (ASCII) can be specified.
Number of characters: One or more characters*2
MQTT server port number 1 to 65534
Client ID Set it with Unicode strings.*1
Number of characters: One or more characters*2
User name Set it with Unicode strings.*1
Number of characters: 0 or more characters*2
Password Set it with ASCII character strings.*1
Number of characters: 0 or more characters*2

*1 Since users enter Unicode strings or ASCII character strings, conversion between Unicode string (UTF-16) and UTF-8 is performed
inside the module.
*2 Strings that meet the following conditions
A+(B+C)2+D984
A: Number of characters in the MQTT server host name
B: Number of characters in the client ID
C: Number of characters in the user name
D: Number of characters in the password

■Encryption algorithms used in TLS communications

The following table lists the encryption algorythms used in TLS communications.
Function name Algorithm
SSL/TLS support (client and server) TLS 1.2
TLS 1.3
DTLS support (client and server) None
Hash function support SHA-1
SHA-256
SHA-384
SHA-512
Encryption with block, stream, and authentication AES CBC
GCM
GMAC
Public-key cryptography RSA
ECDHE-ECDSA
ECDHE-RSA
Curve type of ECC SECP
SECPR2
SECPR3
Key length of ECC 256
384
PSK (pre-shared key) None

4 FUNCTION LIST
48 4.3 Other Functions
Setting procedure
When using the MQTT function, MQTT communication settings (module parameters) are configured with GX Works3. When
verifying the client authentication and server certificates, client certificates and other settings are configured with Certificate
Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
Note that the module parameters can be set from the buffer memory as well. When they are set from both sources, priority is
given to the settings made with the buffer memory.* 1
*1 Check 'MQTT connection setting change function enable flag' (Un\G108805) to find out which setting is being used.

GX Works3 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

Create a new project on GX Works Is the client certificate

setting required?
No 4
and add an Ethernet module.

Yes

Perform the MQTT setting with

Set the client certificate.
the module parameters.

Is the verification No
Create a program to perform MQTT setting for the server certificate
communications using module FBs. set to "Verify"?

Yes

Write the project created on GX Works3 to

a CPU module. (Ethernet port on Set the reliable certificate.
the CPU module or Ethernet module)

Write the certificate setting

Is client authentication or Yes to the Ethernet module.
server verification used? (Ethernet port on the Ethernet module)

No

Setting completion

When creating a program that performs MQTT communications using a module function block, refer to the
following manual.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, CC-Link IE Function Block Reference

■Configuring settings with GX Works3

In "MQTT Communication Setting" of GX Works3, configure the MQTT communication settings (module parameters). (
Page 83 MQTT communication settings)

■Configuring settings with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

This function is configured with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. (Page 85 Certificate Configuration Tool for
FX5-ENET)
For Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, only the port of the Ethernet module can be connected.

For how to obtain Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, refer to the following.
Page 63 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 49
 Function list
The following figures show the overall flows of sending messages to an MQTT broker and receiving them from it.
• When sending messages to a broker

IoT
Device
Cloud

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker Subscriber

(ladder program)

Connect to broker. (Connect)

FB: MQTT_Connect
i_bConnect=OFF→ON
TLS Handshake (Certificate)

CONNECT (ClientID)

CONNACK
FB: MQTT_Connect: output
o_bOK=ON

Publish to broker. (Publish)

PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0 PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0
FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output
o_bOK=ON

PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON
PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0 PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0
FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output
o_bOK=ON

PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0 PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
*QoS=0
FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output
o_bOK=ON

4 FUNCTION LIST
50 4.3 Other Functions
• When receiving messages from a broker

IoT
Device
Cloud

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker Publisher

(ladder program)

SUBSCRIBE request
FB: MQTT_Subscribe
i_bSubscribe=OFF→ON SUBSCRIBE (Topic)

SUBACK
FB: MQTT_Subscribe: output
o_bOK=ON
4
PUBLISH message receive
(when there is no receive data)
FB: MQTT_Receive
i_bEN=OFF→ON

FB: MQTT_Receive: output

o_bOK=ON
o_uReceiveTopicSize=0
o_uReceiveMessageSize=0
PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
PUBLISH (Topic, Data) *QoS=0

PUBLISH message receive

(when there is receive data)
FB: MQTT_Receive
i_bEN=OFF→ON

FB: MQTT_Receive: output

o_bOK=ON
o_uReceiveTopicSize = 1 or more
o_uReceiveMessageSize = 1 or more

Subscribing processing

UNSUBSCRIBE request
FB: MQTT_Subscribe
i_bUnSubscribe=OFF→ON UNSUBSCRIBE (Topic)

UNSUBACK
FB: MQTT_Subscribe: output
o_bOK=ON
PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
PUBLISH *QoS=0

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 51
 ■Connecting to a broker (Connect)
• For TCP connection

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker

(ladder program)

FB: MQTT_Connect
i_bConnect=OFF→ON
CONNECT (ClientID, Username, Password)

CONNACK
FB: MQTT_Connect: return
o_bOK=ON

To connect to a broker, the MQTT client (Ethernet module) sends the CONNECT command to a broker.
When a session is established, the broker returns CONNACK and allows publishing and subscribing. Generally, when using
TCP connection (not using TLS connection), TCP port 1883 is used. Other ports can be used if they are supported by the
broker.
When a firewall is set up between this Ethernet module and the Internet, permission must be given to a port to be used. Set
permission according to the instructions by the system administrator.
A user name and password can be included in the CONNECT command. Brokers can provide their own authentication
mechanism, and the authentication mechanism of the OS (local) can be used. However, if TLS connection is not used and the
above authentication data is not obfuscated, man-in-the-middle attacks or replay attacks may be made.

4 FUNCTION LIST
52 4.3 Other Functions
• For TLS connection

Cloud

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker

(ladder program)

FB: MQTT_Connect
i_bConnect=OFF→ON
TLS Handshake (Certificate)

CONNECT (ClientID) 4

CONNACK
FB: MQTT_Connect: output
o_bOK=ON

To use TLS connection, the MQTT client performs a TLS handshake before sending the CONNECT command. During the
handshake, the client and broker exchange their certificates with each other. The client and broker must be configured in
advance to trust each other's certificates.
When the TLS handshake is completed, the MQTT client sends the CONNECT command. The broker receives the
CONNECT command, performs authentication by using the client certificate and device ID exchanged during the TLS
handshake, and then returns CONNACK, which means that now a session is established. Generally, when using TLS
connection, TCP port 8883 is used. Other ports can be used if they are supported by the broker.
When a firewall is set up between this Ethernet module and the Internet, permission must be given to a port to be used. Set
permission according to the instructions by the system administrator.

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 53
 ■Sending messages to a broker (Publish)

Cloud

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker

(ladder program)

QoS 0
PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
i_uQoS=0 QoS=0

FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output

o_bOK=ON

QoS 1
PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
i_uQoS=1 QoS=1

PUBACK
FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output
o_bOK=ON

QoS 2
PUBLISH request
FB: MQTT_PublishSend
i_bPublish=OFF→ON
PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
i_uQoS=2
QoS=2

PUBREC

PUBREL

PUBCOMP
FB: MQTT_PublishSend: output
o_bOK=ON

To send a message to a broker, the MQTT client (Ethernet module) sends the PUBLISH command to a broker.
Communication with the broker is performed according to QoS. The following three QoS levels exist.
• QoS0: The sending side sends a message only once with Publish. Actual reception by the receiving side is not guaranteed.
• QoS1: The receiving side receives PUBLISH and then returns PUBACK (acknowledgment response), so that the Ethernet
module can confirm that the message has been sent successfully. The sending side resends the message unless PUBACK
is received. This may cause multiple copies of the same message to be delivered to the receiving side.
• QoS2: The receiving side receives PUBLISH and then returns PUBREC (reception response). The sending side receives
PUBREC and then sends PUBREL (release). The receiving side receives PUBREL and then sends PUBCOMP
(completion). While a message is delivered accurately only once and the service quality is high, the communication load
increases due to the increase in communication traffic.

4 FUNCTION LIST
54 4.3 Other Functions
■Receiving messages from a broker (Subscribe)

IoT
Device
Cloud

FX5 CPU module Ethernet module Broker Publisher

(ladder program)

PUBLISH message receiving start

FB: MQTT_Receive
i_bEN=OFF→ON
FB: MQTT_Receive: output
o_bOK=ON
SUBSCRIBE request 4
FB: MQTT_Subscribe
i_bSubscribe=OFF→ON
SUBSCRIBE (Topic)

SUBACK
FB: MQTT_Subscribe: output
o_bOK=ON
PUBLISH (Topic, Data)
PUBLISH (Topic, Data) *QoS=0
FB: MQTT_Receive: output
o_bOK=ON
o_uReceiveTopicSize=One or more
o_uReceiveMessageSize=One or more
Receiving processing

PUBLISH (Topic, Data)

PUBLISH (Topic, Data) *QoS=0
FB: MQTT_Receive: output
o_bOK=ON
o_uReceiveTopicSize=One or more
o_uReceiveMessageSize=One or more
Receiving processing

UNSUBSCRIBE request
FB: MQTT_Subscribe
i_bUnSubscribe=OFF→ON UNSUBSCRIBE (Topic)

UNSUBACK

FB: MQTT_Subscribe: output PUBLISH (Topic, Data)

PUBLISH
o_bOK=ON *QoS=0

As a subscriber, the MQTT client uses FB: MQTT_Subscribe to send a broker the SUBSCRIBE command to request a topic
to subscribe. The broker returns the SUBACK command to the subscriber. When the requested topic matches a topic in the
PUBLISH command received from publishers, the broker uses the PUBLISH command to send the topic name and data to
the subscriber.
The MQTT client uses FB: MQTT_Receive to get the received PUBLISH command.
To cancel a subscription, the subscriber uses the UNSUBSCRIBE command to send the broker the topic name to
unsubscribe. The broker returns the UNSUBACK command to the subscriber. The broker no longer sends the PUBLISH
command to the subscriber even if receiving the PUBLISH command with a topic that matches the unsubscribed topic.

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 55
 Certificate
The certificate used for TLS connection is set with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET and written to the Ethernet
module.
Page 85 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
The following lists the certificate specifications not related to Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.

■Checking certificate expiration

The expiration dates of client certificates are checked periodically.
• When the Ethernet module is started up, and every 24 hours after that, the Ethernet module checks the expiration dates of
client certificates.
• When the certificate is set to expire within 90 days or has already expired, it is notified through an error/event and the buffer
memory. When an event notifying that the certificate will expire within or less than 90 days occurs, renew the certificate by
the expiration date without fail.

■Precautions
• Encrypted communication cannot be performed by using an expired client certificate. Renew client certificates before they
expire.
• The Ethernet module checks expiration if a client certificate exists, regardless of whether encrypted communication is
performed.
• The expiration check is performed every 24 hours. Therefore, there may be cases where a certificate expiration error does
not occur immediately even if a certificate has expired. To avoid the above problem, renew certificates before their
expiration dates.

4 FUNCTION LIST
56 4.3 Other Functions
Function to change MQTT connection settings and tool settings
This function changes the settings of the Ethernet module by using ladder programs to set the values of the MQTT connection
settings and the tool settings (Certificate Configuration Tool and EtherNet/IP Configuration Tool settings) in the buffer memory
and turning on the request for write execution.
The settings of the Ethernet module can be changed without the GX Works3.

■Values that are set to the Ethernet module

When this function is used, instead of the values configured with the module parameters in GX Works3, the setting values
stored in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM are set to the Ethernet module preferentially.
When the write execution is successful, the values are immediately reflected to the settings of the Ethernet module. However,
if a function using the parameters is running, the values will be effective from the next time the function uses the parameters.
In addition, when the Ethernet module is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset, the setting values stored in the 4
Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM are reflected to the Ethernet module.
The storage status is stored in the buffer memory to indicate which source the setting values reflected to the Ethernet module
come from.
Settings with GX Works3 Settings in the buffer memory Storage status Settings of the Ethernet module
No setting No setting 0: Setting values from GX Works3 Default values when the module parameters
are not set in GX Works3
Settings present No setting 0: Setting values from GX Works3 Setting values that are configured with the
module parameters in GX Works3
No setting Settings present 1: Setting values registered to a flash Setting values that are written from the buffer
ROM by using the buffer memory memory
Settings present Settings present 1: Setting values registered to a flash Setting values that are written from the buffer
ROM by using the buffer memory memory

■Operation to write MQTT connection settings

Set new values in 'MQTT connection settings' (Un\G108809 to Un\G108823) and 'MQTT connection settings (string)'
(Un\G109007 to Un\G109506) in the buffer memory, and set 'MQTT connection setting storage area write request
(Un\G108801) to 1 (Execute) or 2 (Execute (no password change)). This causes the values to be written to the MQTT
connection setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM).
The following describes the procedure for writing data to the MQTT connection setting storage area to change the setting
values in the Ethernet module.
1. Store new values in 'MQTT connection settings' (Un\G108809 to Un\G108823)' and 'MQTT connection settings (string)'
(Un\G109007 to Un\G109506).

2. The current setting values of the Ethernet module are reflected to the buffer memory when the system is powered off and
on or when the CPU module is reset. Therefore, change the setting values that need to be changed. (The password is
not reflected.)
3. Write 1 (Execute) to 'MQTT connection setting storage area write request' (Un\G108801).
To exclude the password from being written, write 2 (Execute (no password change)) to 'MQTT connection setting storage
area write request' (Un\G108801).

4. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory area No. Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G108802 MQTT connection setting storage area write b0: 1 (Completed) b0: 1 (Completed)
status b1: 0 (Normal) b1: 1 (Error)
Un\G108806 MQTT connection setting storage area write 0 Error code
error code

5. When the write processing is completed successfully and the values stored in the MQTT connection setting storage area
(in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) are valid, the stored values are immediately reflected to the settings in the
Ethernet module.

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 57
 6. Check the storage status with 'MQTT connection setting change function enable flag' (Un\G108805)
Buffer memory area No. Name Description
Un\G108805 MQTT connection setting change function 0: Setting values from GX Works3
enable flag 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

If the write processing for the MQTT connection setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash
ROM) is not completed successfully, the error code is stored in 'MQTT connection setting storage area write
error code' (Un\G108806).
For details on possible error codes, refer to the following.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

■Operation to clear MQTT connection settings

Setting 'MQTT connection setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108803) to 1 (Execute) clears the MQTT connection
setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) (disables the MQTT connection setting change function).
The following describes the procedure for clearing the MQTT connection setting storage area.
1. Write 1 (Execute) to 'MQTT connection setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108803).

2. Check the clear result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory area No. Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G108804 MQTT connection setting storage area clear b0: 1 (Completed) b0: 1 (Completed)
status b1: 0 (Normal) b1: 1 (Error)
Un\G108807 MQTT connection setting storage area clear 0 Error code
error code

3. When the clear processing is completed successfully, the module parameters in GX Works3 are immediately reflected as
Ethernet module values.

4. Check the storage status with 'MQTT connection setting change function enable flag' (Un\G108805)
Buffer memory area No. Name Description
Un\G108805 MQTT connection setting change function 0: Setting values from GX Works3
enable flag 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

If the clear processing for the MQTT connection setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash
ROM) is not completed successfully, the error code is stored in 'MQTT connection setting storage area clear
error code' (Un\G108807).
For details on possible error codes, refer to the following.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

4 FUNCTION LIST
58 4.3 Other Functions
■Operation to write tool settings
Set new values in 'Tool setting' (Un\G108879 to Un\G108895) of the buffer memory and set 'Tool setting storage area write
request' (Un\G108872) to 1 (Execute) or 2 (Execute (no password change)). This causes the values to be written to the tool
setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM).
The following describes the procedure for writing data to the tool setting storage area to change the setting values in the
Ethernet module.
1. Store new values in 'Tool setting' (Un\G108879 to G108895).

2. The current setting values of the Ethernet module are reflected to the buffer memory when the system is powered off and
on or when the CPU module is reset. Therefore, change the setting values that need to be changed. (The password is
not reflected.)
3. Write 1 (Execute) to 'Tool setting storage area write request' (Un\G108872).
4
To exclude the password from being written, write 2 (Execute (no password change)) to 'Tool setting storage area write
request' (Un\G108872).
4. Check the write result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory area No. Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G108873 Tool setting storage area write status b0: 1 (Completed) b0: 1 (Completed)
b1: 0 (Normal) b1: 1 (Error)
Un\G109877 Tool setting storage area write error code 0 Error code

5. When the write processing is completed successfully and the values stored in the tool setting storage area (in the
Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) are valid, the stored values are immediately reflected to the settings in the
Ethernet module.
6. Check the storage status with 'Tool setting change function enable flag (Un\G109876)'.
Buffer memory area No. Name Description
Un\G109876 Tool setting change function enable flag 0: Setting values from GX Works3
1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

If the write processing for the tool setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) is not
completed successfully, the error code is stored in 'Tool setting storage area write error code' (Un\G108877).
For details on possible error codes, refer to the following.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

4 FUNCTION LIST
4.3 Other Functions 59
 ■Operation to clear tool settings
Setting 'Tool setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108874) to 1 (Execute) clears the tool setting storage area (in the
Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) (disables the tool setting change function).
The following describes the procedure for clearing the tool setting storage area.
1. Write 1 (Execute) to 'Tool setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108874).

2. Check the clear result with the following buffer memory areas.
Buffer memory area No. Name When completed successfully When completed with an error
Un\G109875 Tool setting storage area clear status b0: 1 (Completed) b0: 1 (Completed)
b1: 0 (Normal) b1: 1 (Error)
Un\G109878 Tool setting storage area clear error code 0 Error code

3. When the clear processing is completed successfully, the module parameters in GX Works3 are immediately reflected as
Ethernet module values.

4. Check the storage status with 'Tool setting change function enable flag (Un\G109876)'.
Buffer memory area No. Name Description
Un\G109876 Tool setting change function enable flag 0: Setting values from GX Works3
1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

If the clear processing for the tool setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) is not
completed successfully, the error code is stored in 'Tool setting storage area clear error code (Un\G108878)'.
For details on possible error codes, refer to the list of error codes.
For details on possible error codes, refer to the following.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

■Precautions
The following lists the precautions on the function to change MQTT connection settings and tool settings.
• Power-off and CPU module reset
Do not power off the system or reset the CPU module while writing to or clearing the MQTT connection setting storage area or
the tool setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM). Otherwise, values may not be reflected to the
MQTT connection setting storage area or the tool setting storage area (in the Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM).
• Execution timings of write processing and clear processing
When operating the write or clear request in such a way as turning it on, off, and on or turning it off, on, and off at short
intervals, the write or clear processing for the MQTT connection setting storage area or the tool setting storage area (in the
Ethernet module's built-in flash ROM) may not be executed.
While the write processing is being executed, if the write request is operated 0  1 again, the write processing of the first
operation is completed successfully, and the second write request operation is ignored. (Similarly, the clear request operation
is also ignored.)
While the write processing is being executed, if the clear request is operated 0  1, the clear request operation fails.
(Similarly, performing the write request operation while the clear processing is being executed results in a failure.)
If both the write and clear requests are operated 0  1 simultaneously, priority is given to the write request, and the clear
request operation fails.
• Buffer memory update for the setting value (password)
The current setting value of the Ethernet module is not reflected to the buffer memory when the system is powered off and on
or when the CPU module is reset. This is because passwords for MQTT connection settings/tool settings are different from
other setting values from a security perspective. In addition, when the write execution is completed, the value in the buffer
memory is cleared to 0.

4 FUNCTION LIST
60 4.3 Other Functions
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

5.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic System

Configuration
Configure a network system using modules and partner products supporting CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Connect the modules in a star topology using a switching hub and Ethernet cables. Line and ring topologies are not possible.

(1)

(2)
5

(3) (3) (3)

(1) FX5-ENET (master station)

(2) Hub
(3) External device (remote station)

Access range
The access range of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is within the same network address of Ethernet. The device connected
beyond the router is not accessible.

Ex.
When the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 and the network address is 192.168.3.
192.168.3.39

(1) (4)

(3)

(2)
192.168.4.2

(3) (3) (3)

192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.3

Accessible Not accessible

(1) FX5-ENET (master station)

(2) Hub
(3) External device (remote station)
(4) Router

Use the same subnet mask value and do not assign the same IP address for each remote station.

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic System Configuration 61
 Number of link points
The number of link points per remote station is 64 points for RX/RY and 32 points for RWr/RWw. ( Page 18 Performance
Specifications)
However, by changing the number of occupied stations, RX/RY can be set to a maximum of 256 points in increments of 64
points and RWr/RWw can be set to a maximum of 128 points in increments of 32 points. For details on the number of
occupied stations (whether or not the number can be changed), refer to the manual for the remote station used.
If the number of link points for the remote station is changed, the assignment range and station number are changed.

(1)

(2) (3) (4)

(1) Master station

(2) Remote station 1: 1 station occupied
(3) Remote station 2: 2 stations occupied
(4) Remote station 3: 4 stations occupied

The following table lists the number of link points.

Remote Number of occupied RX/RY RWr/RWw
station stations Number of Start End Number of Start End
points points
1 1 occupied station 64 0 3F 32 0 1F
2 2 occupied stations 128 40 BF 64 20 5F
3 4 occupied stations 256 C0 1BF 128 60 DF

Setting the number of link points for a remote station to 2 stations occupied means that two remote stations
are connected. Thus, if the number of link points is increased, the number of connectable remote stations per
network is decreased.

5.2 General-purpose Ethernet Communication

Configuration
For details on the system configuration of the general-purpose Ethernet, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication)

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
62 5.2 General-purpose Ethernet Communication Configuration
5.3 Applicable Engineering Tool
GX Works3 is required to set the FX5-ENET.
To use digital certificates for e-mail or MQTT functions, Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET is required.
The applicable engineering tools are shown as follows.
Engineering tool Applicable versions
GX Works3 Ver. 1.050C or later
Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET Ver. 1.00A or later

About GX Works3
For the latest version of GX Works3, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

■GX Works3 version check

Display information such as the software version of GX Works3.
5
Select [Help]  [Version Information...].

Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

For Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

■Operating environment, installation and uninstallation

For the operating environment and installation/uninstallation of Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, refer to the
following.
Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET Installation Instructions

■Operation methods and functions

For operation methods and functions of Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, refer to the following.
Page 85 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.3 Applicable Engineering Tool 63
 6 WIRING

6.1 Grounding
Perform the following.
• Perform class D grounding. (Grounding resistance: 100 or less)
• Ground the PLC independently when possible.
• If the PLC cannot be grounded independently, perform the "Shared grounding" shown below.

Other Other Other

PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding

(Best condition) (Good condition) (Not allowed)

• Bring the grounding point close to the PLC as much as possible so that the ground cable can be shortened.

Grounding of FX5-ENET
(1)

(3)

(2)
(1) Ground terminal of CPU module
(2) FG terminal of FX5-ENET
(3) D grounding (Grounding resistance: 100 or less)

Terminal name Content

FG (Ground terminal) Perform class D grounding. (Grounding resistance: 100 or less)

The connection destination for the FG terminal of FX5-ENET is a spring clamp terminal block.
To connect to the terminal block, there are two ways: by using single wires/stranded wires or by using ferrules. Make sure to
properly connect in accordance with the following specifications.

■Ferrule
The following table shows wire ferrules and its associated tools compatible with the terminal block. The shape of the wire
ferrule differs depending on the crimp tool to be used, use the reference product. If the product other than referenced products
is used, the wire ferrule cannot be removed. Sufficiently confirm that the wire ferrule can be removed before use.
<Reference product>
Manufacturer Sleeve Ferrules model Suitable wire size Crimp tool
2
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH Ferrules with insulation AI 0.25-8 YE 0.25mm CRIMPFOX 6
& Co. KG sleeve AI 0.34-8 TQ 0.3, 0.34mm2
AI 0.5-8 WH 0.5mm2
AI 0.75-8 GY 0.75mm2
Ferrules without insulation A 0,25-7 0.25mm2
sleeve
A 0,34-7 0.3, 0.34mm2
A 0,5-8 0.5mm2
A 0,75-8 0.75mm2
AI 1.0-8 1.0mm2
AI 1.5-7 1.25, 1.5mm2

6 WIRING
64 6.1 Grounding
The wires to connect the spring clamp terminal block are described below.
Number of wires per terminal Wire size
Single wire, strand wire Ferrule with insulation sleeve
One wiring AWG24 to 16 AWG23 to 19
(0.2 to 1.5mm2) (0.25 to 0.75mm2)

■Wire end treatment

Strip the cable about 10mm from the tip to connect a wire ferrule at the stripped area. Failure to do so may result in electric
shock due to the conductive part. If the wire strip length is too short, it may result in the poor contact to the spring clamp
terminal part. Depending on the thickness of the sheath, it may be difficult to insert into the insulation sleeve, so select the
wires by referring to the appearance diagram.
Strand wire/single wire Ferrule with insulation sleeve

Insulation sleeve Contact area

(Crimp area)
10 mm

8 mm

2 to 2.8 mm 14 mm

Check the shape of the wire insertion opening with the following chart, and use the smaller wire ferrule than the described 6
size. Also, insert the wire with care so that the wire ferrule is in proper orientation. Failure to do so may cause the bite of the
terminal and the damage of the terminal block.

Shape of the wire Sectional shape of a wire ferrule

insertion opening

2.4 mm

1.5 mm When using a tool of the reference

product, the sectional shape becomes
a trapezoid close to a rectangle.

Terminal block

■Connection and disconnection of the cable

• Connection of the cable
Fully insert a cable whose end has been properly processed into the wire insertion opening.
If the cable cannot be inserted with this procedure, fully insert the cable while pushing the open/close button with a flathead
screwdriver having a tip width of 2.0 to 2.5mm. After fully inserting the cable, remove the screwdriver.
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG SZS 0.42.5 VDE

Precautions
Pull the cable or wire ferrule slightly to check that the cable is securely clamped.
• Disconnection of the cable
Push the open/close button of the wire to be disconnected with a flathead screwdriver. Pull out the wire with the open/close
button pushed.

6 WIRING
6.1 Grounding 65
 6.2 Wiring Method
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the Ethernet cable.

Connecting the cable

1. Turn the power supply of FX5-ENET (CPU module) and external device off.

2. Push the Ethernet cable connector into the FX5-ENET until it clicks. Pay attention to the orientation of the connector.

3. Lightly pull the connector to check that the connector is securely connected.

4. Turn the power supply of FX5-ENET (CPU module) and external device on.

5. Check whether the SPEED LED of the port connected with an Ethernet cable is on.* 1
*1 The time between the cable connection and the turning on of the SPEED LED may vary. The SPEED LED usually turns after a few
seconds. Note, however, that the time may be extended further if the link-up processing is repeated depending on the status of the
device on the line.

Disconnecting the cable

1. Turn the power supply of FX5-ENET (CPU module) off.

2. Unplug the Ethernet cable while pressing the latch connector down.

Precautions
• Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp it. If the cable is not placed in a duct or secured with clamps, the cable may
swing, drag or be carelessly pulled, and the module or cable may be damaged, or cable contact failure may cause
malfunction.
• Do not touch the core of the cable-side or module-side connector, and protect them from dirt or dust. If oil on your hands,
dirt, or dust adheres to the core, transmission loss may increase, causing communication problems.
• Check that the Ethernet cable is not disconnected or not shorted and check that the cable is connected properly.
• Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latch connectors. Doing so may cause the Ethernet cables to be disconnected or
the module to malfunction.
• Hold the connector part of the Ethernet cable when connecting and disconnecting it. Pulling the cable connected to the
module may result in damage to the module or the cable or malfunction due to poor contact.
• For connectors without Ethernet cable, attached connector cover should be placed to prevent foreign matter such as dirt or
dust.
• The maximum station-to-station distance of the Ethernet cable is 100m. However, the acceptable length may be shorter
depending on the environment where the cable is used. For details, contact the cable manufacturer.
• The bending radius of the Ethernet cable is limited. For details, check the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used.

6 WIRING
66 6.2 Wiring Method
6.3 Wiring Products
This section describes the devices used to comprise a network.

Ethernet cable
Use Ethernet cables that meet the following standards.

■CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Communication speed Specifications Connector Ethernet standard
100Mbps Ethernet cable: Category 5 or higher (STP cable*1) RJ45 connector 100BASE-TX

■General-purpose Ethernet
Communication speed Specifications Connector Ethernet standard
100Mbps Ethernet cable: Category 5 or higher (STP cable*1) RJ45 connector 100BASE-TX
10Mbps Ethernet cable: Category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cable*1) RJ45 connector 10BASE-T

*1 Shielded twisted pair cable.

A straight/cross cable can be used.
6
Depending on the connection environment, communication errors may occur due to high-frequency noise
from devices other than programmable controllers. The following describes precautionary measures to be
taken on the FX5-ENET to avoid the influence of high-frequency noise.
[Wiring]
• When wiring cables, do not bundle them together with or keep them in close proximity to the main circuit
lines or power cables.
• Place cables in a duct.
• Use STP cables in place of UTP cables.

Hub
Use hubs which satisfy all the following conditions. If hubs not satisfying the conditions are used, operation is not guaranteed.
• IEEE802.3 (100BASE-TX) compliant
• The auto MDI/MDI-X function equipped
• The auto-negotiation function equipped
• Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1
*1 A repeater hub cannot be used.
For switching hubs that can be used for CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, refer to the following.
Applicable products (switching hubs) for CC-Link IE Field Network Basic module (FA-A-0234)

6 WIRING
6.3 Wiring Products 67
 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
This section describes the parameter settings required to perform CC-Link IE Field Network Basic and general-purpose
Ethernet communication with FX5-ENET.
For details on each operation of GX Works3, refer to  GX Works3 Operating Manual.

7.1 Procedure for Setting Parameters

1. Add the "Information Module (FX5-ENET)" in GX Works3.* 1
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Right-click  [Add New Module]

2. Select the "FX5-ENET".

[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-ENET]

3. Set the parameter.

4. Write the parameter settings to the CPU module.

[Online]  [Write to PLC]

5. The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system.
*1 FX5-ENET can be added to GX Works3 also from the module configuration diagram.

Writing parameters
The FX5-ENET parameters are written to the CPU module.
For writing parameters to the CPU module, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual

7.2 Required Setting

Set the operation mode of the FX5-ENET.

Mode
Set the operation mode of the FX5-ENET.
Item Description Setting range
Communication Mode Set the operation mode of the FX5-ENET. • Online
• Online: Normal operation mode • Hardware Test
• Hardware Test: Mode in which the module performs a self-diagnostics (Default: Online)
test. Select this mode when checking the operation of the module due to
an error or similar problem. ( Page 106 Hardware Test)

In the hardware test mode, other parameters cannot be set.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
68 7.1 Procedure for Setting Parameters
7.3 Basic Setting
Set the IP address and functions of FX5-ENET.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 69
 Own Node Setting
Set the IP address of the FX5-ENET.
Item Description Setting range
*1
IP Address Setting IP Address Set the IP address of the FX5-ENET. • Blank
Set the class and subnet address of the FX5-ENET to the same settings • 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
as those of the external devices that communicate with the FX5-ENET. (Default: Blank)
Contact the network administrator before setting the IP address.
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the FX5-ENET. • Blank
When setting the IP address of the default gateway and performing • 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255
communication with an external device in another network through a (Default: Blank)
router, set the subnet mask pattern of the default gateway. All the
devices in the same subnetwork should have a common subnet mask.
The subnet mask setting is not required for communication in a single
network.
Default Gateway Set the default gateway of the FX5-ENET. • Blank
Set the IP address of the relay device (default gateway) to access the • 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
external device in another network. (Default: Blank)
Set a value that satisfies the following conditions as the IP address of
the default gateway.
• The class of the IP address is A, B, or C.
• The subnet address of the default gateway is the same as that of the
FX5-ENET.
• The host address part is not a sequence of "0" or "1".
Communication Data Code Select the format of the data to be used for communication. • Binary
• Binary: Communicating data in binary code • ASCII (X, Y octal)
• ASCII (X, Y octal): Communicating in ASCII code (X, Y octal) • ASCII (X, Y hexadecimal)
• ASCII (X, Y hexadecimal): Communicating in ASCII code (X, Y (Default: Binary)
hexadecimal)
Opening Method Select how to open a connection. • Do Not Open by Program
• Do Not Open by Program: Select this item to perform open • Open by Program
processing and open the connection by the external device. Program (Default: Do Not Open by Program)
for open/close processing is not required.
• Open by Program: Select this item to perform open/close processing
and open/close the connection by a program.

*1 When the parameter is written without the IP address setting (blank), the following address is set.
192.168.3.251

Operational Setting
Set the destination alive check conditions for socket communication.
Item Description Setting range
Timer Settings for Change/Set Timer Select whether to change timer values from the default. • No
Data Communication Value The timer operates with its default value when "No" is selected. • Yes
(Default: No)
Destination Alive Set the time interval between the reception of the last message from the • Unit [s]: 1 to 16383
Check Start Interval external device and the start of alive check. • Unit [ms]: 100 to 16383000
Timer (Default: 600s)
Destination Alive Set the time interval for performing alive check again when no response • Unit [s]: 1 to 16383
Check Interval Timer is returned from the external device of alive check target. • Unit [ms]: 100 to 16383000
(Default: 10s)
Destination Alive Set the number of times to perform alive check when no response is 1 to 32767
Check Resend returned from the external device of alive check target. (Default: 3 times)
Count

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
70 7.3 Basic Setting
CC-Link IEF Basic Setting
Set the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Item Description Setting range
Network Configuration Settings Set the information of the remote station to the master station. Moreover, 
configure link scan settings (timeout time and number of retries for remote
station disconnection detection). ( Page 71)
Refresh Settings Configure the settings to automatically link refresh RX/RY/RWr/RWw data 
to the devices. ( Page 75)
Station-based Block Data Assurance Set whether to assure the data in station units when refreshing the link • Enable
between the host station and CPU module. This prevents the data that is • Disable
read/written for each slave is not separated into the new data and old data. (Default: Disable)

Network Configuration Settings

Set the network configuration.
Double-click <Detailed Setting> of the "Network Configuration Settings".

Item Description Setting range

[Detect Now] button Connected devices are automatically detected. 
[Link Scan Setting] button Configure link scan settings. 
Connected Count The total number of connected remote stations is displayed. 
No. The station number of the remote station is displayed. 
Model Name Module model name is displayed. 
When there is no module information, "Module With No Profile Found" is
displayed.
STA# The start station number of the remote station is displayed. 
Station Type The station type (master station/remote station) is displayed. 
RX/RY Setting Points Set the assignment of the number of points for RX/RY in increments of • 64 (1 Occupied Station)
64 points. • 128 (2 Occupied Stations)
• 192 (3 Occupied Stations)
• 256 (4 Occupied Stations)
(Default: 64 (1 Occupied Station))
Start The start number of RX/RY is displayed. 
End The end number of RX/RY is displayed. 
RWw/RWr Setting Points The number of points for the number of stations in increments of 32 
points is displayed.
Start The start number of RWw/RWr is displayed. 
End The end number of RWw/RWr is displayed. 
Group No. Set group numbers of remote stations. 1 to 2
(Default: 1)
RSVD STA Set whether to set the remote station as a reserved station. • No Setting
• Reserved Station
(Default: No Setting)

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 71
 Item Description Setting range
IP Address Specify the IP address of the remote station. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
(Default: *1)
Subnet Mask Specify the subnet mask of the remote station. 0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255
(Default: Subnet mask of the master
station)
MAC Address The MAC address of the remote station is displayed. 
Comment The information entered in "Comment1" on the "Properties" window Up to 32 one-byte characters/16
displayed by right-clicking the module in the list of stations or the two-byte characters
network map is displayed. (Default: Blank)

*1 First to third octet: First to third octet of the IP address of the master station
Fourth octet: Automatically numbered from the number not in use from 1 to 254 in ascending order

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
72 7.3 Basic Setting
■Automatic detection of connected device
Detects the connected remote stations and reflects to the network configurations setting.

Follow the operating procedure below to use the automatic detection of connected device.
In the network configuration setting, communication settings such as IP addresses and subnet masks can be configured for
the detected remote stations. Parameters that are inherent in the remote stations can also be read/written from/to the network
configuration setting. (Some remote stations do not support these features.) Various settings of all remote stations can be
configured in parameters of the master station (the settings do not need to be configured in each individual remote station)
and therefore the man-hour for the setting will be reduced.
7
1. Start up a new project in GX Works3 and execute the automatic detection of connected device.

2. Detected remote stations are reflected in the network configuration setting. Change the items such as the connection
order and numbers of occupied stations and set station numbers.

3. Configure IP addresses and subnet masks of remote stations in the network configuration setting. And then, reflect the
settings to the remote stations.
Select a module on the list of stations or the network map  [Online]  [Communication Setting Reflection of Remote
Station]

4. Parameters that are inherent in the remote stations can be read/written from/to the network configuration setting.* 1 For
details on the parameters inherent in each remote station, refer to the manuals of the remote station used.
Select a module on the list of stations or the network map  [Online]  [Parameters Processing of Remote Station]
*1 To read parameters, select "Parameter read" from "Method selection" and click the [Execute] button. Parameters read are displayed in
the column of "Read Value". To write parameters, select "Parameter write" from "Method selection", input data to the column of "Write
Value", and then click the [Execute] button.

Remote station settings in the network configuration setting must be configured after executing the automatic
detection of connected device.
If not, contents of setting items that have been already configured in the network configuration setting are
overwritten by ones detected by the automatic detection. Detected remote stations are reflected in the
network configuration setting in ascending order of MAC address and values such as the number of occupied
stations becomes initial value.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 73
 If an error occurs while the automatic detection of connected device is being executed, the window shown below appears.

Each of the error codes listed below fills the last four digits of <0x2c09****>.
Error code Error details and cause Action
C055H and C056H System error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the target device.
• Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the hub.
• Check the line status of Ethernet.
• Reset the CPU module and target device, and execute the function again.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact the manufacturer of
the target device.
C059H The function which is not supported by the target device Check whether the function executed is supported by the target device.
was executed.
C05CH • The setting value of the communication setting is out of Correct the setting details, and retry the operation.
range.
• Items of communication setting which cannot be set on
the target device are set.
• The required setting items have not been set to the
target device.
C061H System error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the target device.
• Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the hub.
• Check the line status of Ethernet.
• Reset the CPU module and target device, and execute the function again.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact the manufacturer of
the target device.
CEE0H The detection or another online function was executed by Execute the other function after the automatic detection of connected
another peripheral. devices is completed.
CEE1H to CEE2H System error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the target device.
CF10H
• Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the hub.
• Check the line status of Ethernet.
• Reset the CPU module and target device, and execute the function again.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact the manufacturer of
the target device.
CF20H • The setting value of the communication setting is out of Correct the setting details, and retry the operation.
range.
• Items of communication setting which cannot be set on
the target device are set.
• The required setting items have not been set to the
target device.
CF30H The parameter which is not supported by the target Check the version of the target device.
device was specified.
CF31H System error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
CF50H • Check the operating status and connection status of the target device.
• Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the hub.
• Check the line status of Ethernet.
• Reset the CPU module and target device, and execute the function again.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact the manufacturer of
the target device.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
74 7.3 Basic Setting
Error code Error details and cause Action
CF51H The function cannot be executed because the function Execute the function again after a while.
from another peripheral is being executed.
CF53H to CF56H System error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the target device.
• Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the hub.
• Check the line status of Ethernet.
• Reset the CPU module and target device, and execute the function again.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact the manufacturer of
the target device.
CF70H An error has occurred on the Ethernet communication • Check the operation of the target device.
path. • Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
CF71H Timeout error • Check the precautions for the function executed.
• Check the operation of the target device.
• Since there may be congestion of packets on the line, send data after a
certain period of time.

■Link Scan Setting

Set constant scan time, timeout time and number of retries for remote station disconnection detection.

7
Item Description Setting range
Constant Scan Time Constant Scan Time Set the constant scan time (ms). 2 to 2000
Setting Setting (2 to 2000) (Default: 2)
Remote Station Time-out Period (1 to Set the timeout time (ms) for remote station disconnection detection.*1 1 to 65535
Disconnect Detected 65535) (Default: 500)
Setting
Counts Set the number of retries for remote station disconnection 3, 5, 10
detection.*1*2 (Default: 3)
Remote Station The operation image regarding the remote station disconnection 
Disconnect Detected detection period is displayed. Refer to this at the setting of "Time-out
Image Diagram Period".
Display

*1 Constant scan time, timeout time, and the number of times for disconnection detection are counted for each remote station.
*2 Disconnection occurs in the event that no response is received from the remote station for the specified number of times in succession
within the timeout time.

• For setting of constant scan time and timeout time, specify an adequate value according to the actual
system used.
• Constant scan time, time-out Period and Counts can be set for each group.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 75
 Refresh Settings
Set refresh parameters.
Double-click <Detailed Setting> of the "Refresh Settings".

Item Description Setting range

Link Side The number of points for the link devices (RX/RY, RWr/RWw) for the 
number of occupied stations and start/end device number set in the network
configuration settings are displayed.
CPU Side Target The target destination to be link refreshed is displayed. Specify Device
(Default: Blank)
Device Name Set the device of the link refresh target. X, Y, M, L, B, D, W, R*1
(Default: Blank)
Points The number of device points for the link refresh target is displayed. (The 
same value as the number of points on the link side is displayed.)
Start Set the start device number within the link refresh range. Follow the device settings of the
CPU parameters.*2
(Default: Blank)
End The end device number within the link refresh range is displayed. 

*1 If the remote stations are more than 16 units, since the number of device points of X and Y for the refresh target is short, assign the
devices to M, L, B and other devices.
*2 For device settings, refer to  MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Application).

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
76 7.3 Basic Setting
BACnet function setting
Set the BACnet functions.
Item Description Setting range
Whether the BACnet functions are used or Indicates the usage status of the BACnet/IP connection modules in the • Not used
not external device configuration. (This setting is automatically configured • Used
according to the setting details in the external device configuration.) (Default: Not used)
Network Network number Set a BACnet network number. 0 to 65534
information (Default: 0)
setting
BACnet device setting Page 77 BACnet device setting 
BACnet object setting Page 78 BACnet object setting 

BACnet device setting

Set a BACnet device.
Item Description Setting range
Instance No. Set a BACnet instance number. 0 to 4194303
(Default: 0)
Object Name Set a device name. (The same value cannot be set in a module.) 16 one-byte alphanumeric
characters maximum
(Default: Blank)
BACnet standards Set the BACnet standards. • ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2016 7
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2012
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2010
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2004
• IEIEJ-G-0006:2006 Addendum a
(Default: ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
135-2016)
I-Am send Send control Set whether or not to send I-Am only when the device is set to Operational. • Send I-Am only at the
setting Operational status.
• Send I-Am even at other
statuses than Operational.
(Default: Send I-Am only at the
Operational status.)
Send I-Am when the Set whether or not to send I-Am when the device status changes to • Do not send
status changes to Operational. • Send
Operational (Default: Send)
Enable/disable Set whether or not to send I-Am at a fixed-cycle. • Disable
fixedcycle send • Enable
(Default: Disable)
Fixed-cycle send interval Set the interval (second) for sending I-Am. (Available when the enable/ 1 to 4095
(second) disable fixed-cycle send is set to Enable) (Default: 60)
I-Am response setting Set how to send I-Am and I-Have for Who-Is and Who-Has. • RemoteBroadcast
• GlobalBroadcast
• LocalBroadcast
• Unicast
(Default: LocalBroadcast)
I-Am send setting Set how to send the spontaneous I-Am. • LocalBroadcast
• GlobalBroadcast
(Default: LocalBroadcast)

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 77
 Item Description Setting range
Device restart Device restart procedure Set the device restart procedure. • Do not support
procedure • Support
setting (Default: Do not support)
Notification destination Set a network number to which notification is sent at device restart. 0 to 65534
network number (Available when device restart is set to "Support") (Default: 0)
Notification destination Set the IPv4 address to which notification is sent at device restart. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
IP address (Available when device restart is set to "Support") (Default: 192.168.0.254)
Notification destination Set a port number to which notification is sent at device restart. (Available 0 to 65535
port number when device restart is set to "Support") (Default: 47808)
Time synchronization setting Set the response for receiving wild card. • Ignore
• Output to buffer memory
(Default: Ignore)

BACnet object setting

Set the instance number, etc. of each object.
For details, refer to  MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet Reference Manual.
Item Description Setting range
Accumulator object setting Set the Accumulator object. 
AnalogInput object setting Set AnalogInput object. 
AnalogOutput object setting Set AnalogOutput object. 
AnalogValue object setting Set AnalogValue object. 
BinaryInput object setting Set BinaryInput object. 
BinaryOutput object setting Set BinaryOutput object. 
BinaryValue object setting Set BinaryValue object. 
Multi-stateInput object setting Set Multi-state Input object. 
Multi-stateOutput object setting Set Multi-state Output object. 

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
78 7.3 Basic Setting
External Device Configuration
Set the conditions of the external devices with which the module will communicate through general-purpose Ethernet.
Double-click <Detailed Setting> of the "External Device Configuration".

Drag and drop an "Ethernet Device" in the "Module List" to the left side of the screen, and set the following items. The setting
items vary depending on the "Ethernet Device" and "Communication Method".
Item Description Setting range
No. Connection number for distinguishing settings for each user connection. 
7
Model Name The name of the external device is displayed. 
Communication Method Set the method for communication with the external device.*1 • MELSOFT Connection
• SLMP
• Socket communication
• BACnet/IP
• Mail Send
• MQTT
Protocol Select the communication protocol for the external device.*1 • TCP
• UDP*3
• TLS*4
Fixed Buffer Send/Receive Setting Not supported. 
PLC IP Address The IP address of host station (FX5-ENET) is displayed. 
Port No. The port number of host station (FX5-ENET) is displayed. • Blank
• 1 to 5548, 5570 to 65534*2
(Default: Blank)
Sensor/Device MAC Address Not supported. 
Host Name Not supported. 
IP Address Set the IP address of the external device. • Blank
• 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
(Default: Blank)
Port No. Set the port number of the external device. • Blank
• 1 to 65534
(Default: Blank)
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the external device. 
Default Gateway Set the default gateway of the external device. 
Existence Confirmation Select the method of alive check which is performed when the Ethernet- • KeepAlive
equipped module has not communicated with the external device for a • Do not confirm existence
certain period of time. When the module cannot communicate with the
external device, the connection will be closed.*1

*1 Automatically set by the "Ethernet Device".

The protocol can be selected when "Communication Method" is "SLMP", "Mail Send", or "MQTT".
*2 Do not specify 5549 to 5569 because these ports are used by the system.
*3 This value cannot be selected for mail server connection devices and MQTT connection devices.
*4 This value can be selected for mail server connection devices and MQTT connection devices.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.3 Basic Setting 79
 7.4 Application Settings
Set the following parameters when the functions of the general-purpose Ethernet will be used on FX5-ENET.

DNS settings
Configure the DNS settings.
Item Description Setting range
DNS Settings Set the IP addresses of the DNS servers so that the mail server can be specified with domain • Not to Use
name. • To Use
(Default: Not to Use)
DNS server 1 address Set the IP address of DNS server 1. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 2 address Set the IP address of DNS server 2. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 3 address Set the IP address of DNS server 3. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
DNS server 4 address Set the IP address of DNS server 4. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Simple CPU communication settings

Set the simple CPU communication.
Item Description Setting range
To Use or Not to Use Set whether to enable the simple CPU communication function. • Not to Use
Simple CPU • To Use
Communication (Default: Not to Use)
CPU Response Monitoring Set the time for monitoring the response from the FX5-ENET. • Unit [s]: 1 to 16383
Timer If the FX5-ENET does not respond within the set time, the response wait state will be • Unit [ms]: 100 to 16383000
canceled. (Default: 5s)
Simple CPU Set the details for simple CPU communication. 
Communication Setting For details, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication)

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
80 7.4 Application Settings
Security
Set the security function.
Item Description Setting range
IP Filter Settings IP Filter Set whether to enable the IP filter function. • Disable
• Enable
(Default: Disable)
IP Filter Settings Set the IP address to be allowed or denied. ( Page 81) 
Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT Permit/prohibit direct connection with the engineering tool. • Disable
• Enable
(Default: Enable)
Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search Set whether to respond to search for the CPU modules on the network. • Do Not Respond
• Respond
(Default: Respond)
Certificate Connection Control Set the authentication method to connect to Certificate Configuration Tool. • Connection enable
Configuration Tool Setting • Connection enable: Connection can be established without password • Password Authentication
authentication. • Connection disable
• Password Authentication: Connection can be established through (Default: Connection enable)
password authentication.
• Connection disable: Connection cannot be established. (Any attempt
results in a communication error.)
Communications with Certificate Configuration Tool are not encrypted, as the
traffic is assumed to flow on a local network.
Considering the risk of password eavesdropping by a third party, after using
this tool to configure the settings, set "Connection disable" for normal
operation.
Password Set the password to connect to Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. 6 to 31 characters 7
This field is enabled only when "Connection Control Setting" is set to (Default: Blank)
"Password Authentication".

IP Filter Settings
Set the IP address for which the IP filter function will be used.
Double-click <Detailed Setting> of the "IP Filter Settings".

Item Description Setting range

Access from IP address below Select whether to allow or deny the access from the specified IP addresses. • Allow
• Deny
(Default: Allow)
Range Setting Select this item when specifying the IP addresses by range. 
IP Address Set the IP address to be allowed or denied. • Blank
When selecting "Range Setting", enter the start IP address (left field) and end • 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
IP address (right field) of the range. (Default: Blank)
IP Address Excluded from Range When selecting "Range Setting", set the IP address to be excluded from the • Blank
set range. • 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
Up to 32 IP addresses can be set. (Default: Blank)

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.4 Application Settings 81
 E-mail settings
Configure settings for e-mail.
Item Description Setting range
To Use or Not to Use Mail Function Setting Set whether to use the e-mail function. • Not used
• Used
(Default: Not used)
Send Source Name Sender Name Specifies the sender name as a Unicode string (UTF-16). 64 characters (64 words) or less
This item can be left blank.
(Default: Blank)
Sender e-mail address Set the e-mail address of the Ethernet module in ASCII. 64 characters (32 words) or less
(Default: Blank)
SMTP Server Settings Specification Method Set how to specify the outgoing mail server. • Host Name
• IP Address
(Default: Host Name)
IP Address Set the IP address of the SMTP server. 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254
This item is not available when
"Specification Method" is set to "Host
Name".
(Default: Blank)
Host Name Set the host name of the SMTP server. 64 characters (32 words) or less
This item is not available when
"Specification Method" is set to "IP
Address".
(Default: Blank)
Port No. Set the outgoing mail server port number. • No authentication: 25
• SMTPS: 465
• Specify a number: 1 to 65534
(Default: 25)
SMTP Server SMTP Server Settings Set the authentication method for the outgoing mail server. • No authentication
Authentication Authentication • SMTP-AUTH
Information Authentication Method (Default: No authentication)
SMTP Server Settings Set the login ID for the outgoing mail server in ASCII. 64 characters (32 words) or less
Authentication User This item is not available when "SMTP
Name Authentication Method" is set to "No
authentication".
(Default: Blank)
SMTP Server Setting Set the password for the outgoing mail server in ASCII. 64 characters (32 words) or less
Authentication This item is not available when "SMTP
Password Authentication Method" is set to "No
authentication".
(Default: Blank)
SMTP Server Settings Authentication Certificate Specifies whether to verify the certificate. • Not to verify the certificate
Verification • Verify the certificate
(Default: Not to verify the certificate)
Send Mail Address Detailed Setting (No.1 Set destination mail addresses. A maximum of 10 addresses can Each mail address must have 64
Setting to 10) be set. characters (32 words) or less.
When sending an e-mail by the Ethernet module, the module This item can be left blank.
function block "Preset destination address instruction" is used in (Default: Blank)
a program to select among destination mail addresses 1 to 10.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
82 7.4 Application Settings
MQTT communication settings
Configure settings for MQTT communication.
Item Description Setting range
To Use or Not to Use MQTT Function Displays the usage status of the MQTT function. • Not used
"To Use or Not to Use MQTT Function" cannot be edited directly. To use the MQTT • Used
function, add an MQTT connection device to the external device configuration. (Default: Not used)
MQTT MQTT server Select an MQTT server (MQTT broker) specification method. • Host Name
Connection specification method • IP Address
Setting (Default: Host Name)
MQTT Server Host Set the endpoint URL of the MQTT server (MQTT broker). (ASCII) 984 characters or less*1
Name This item is available only when 'MQTT server specification method' (Un\G108811) (Default: Blank)
is 0 (Host name specification).
MQTT Server IP Set an MQTT server (MQTT broker) IP address. 0.0.0.1 to
Address This item is available only when 'MQTT server specification method' (Un\G108811) 223.255.255.254
is 1 (IP address specification). (Default: Blank)
MQTT Server Port No. Set the port number of the MQTT server (MQTT broker). 1 to 65534
(Default: 1)
Client ID Set the client ID of the Ethernet module. (UTF-16) 1 to 492 characters*1
(Default: Blank)
User Name Set the user name to be used for authentication when connecting to the MQTT 0 to 492 characters*1
server (MQTT broker). (UTF-16) (Default: Blank)
This item does not need to be set if authentication with a device certificate is to be
performed with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
Password Set the password to be used for authentication when connecting to the MQTT 0 to 984 characters*1 7
server (MQTT broker). (ASCII) (Default: Blank)
This item does not need to be set if authentication with a device certificate is to be
performed with Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. The entered
characters are displayed as obscured text.
MQTT Certificate Verify Server Certificate Select whether to verify the validity of the certificate of the destination server when • Verify
Setting connecting to the MQTT server (MQTT broker). • Not to verify
If "Verify" is set, register the certificate using Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5- (Default: Verify)
ENET.

*1 The maximum number of the settable characters should also meet the following conditions.
A+(B+C)2+D984
A: Number of characters in the MQTT server host name
B: Number of characters in the client ID
C: Number of characters in the user name
D: Number of characters in the password

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
7.4 Application Settings 83
 7.5 Starting Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-
ENET
After starting Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET, register and list trusted certificates or CRLs (certificate revocation
lists) and manage client certificates.

Operating procedure
1. Display the "Module Tool List" window on GX Works3.
[Tool]  [Module Tool List]

2. Start Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.

[Information Module]  [Certificate Configuration Tool]

3. Register and list trusted certificates or CRLs (certificate revocation lists) and manage client certificates.
For details, refer to the following.
Page 85 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

• Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET can be started from the Module Tool List for the GX Works3
version "1.095Z" or later. When using GX Works3 whose version is lower than "1.095Z", start it from the
start menu or shortcut that is created when Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET is installed.
• Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET can still be operated independently even when GX Works3 is
terminated during operation.

7 PARAMETER SETTINGS
84 7.5 Starting Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL
This chapter describes Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET

This section describes Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
The following figure shows the window structure.

(1)
(2)
(3)

No. Name Reference

(1) Menu bar Page 86
(2) Server Certificates Page 87
(3) Client Certificates Page 90

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET 85
 Menu
This is the menu configuration of Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
Item Description Reference
Project Displays submenu items related to project files. Page 86
Connection Settings Configure connection settings for communicating with a module. Page 86
Help Displays the help and version information for Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. Page 86

Project
Displays submenu items related to project files.
Item Description
New Creates a new project.
Open Opens an existing project.
Close Closes the current project.
Save Saves the current project.
Save As Saves the current project as a new project file.
Exit Closes the current project and exits the Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.

Connection Settings
Configure connection settings for communicating with a module.
[Connection Settings]

Item Description
Host (IP Address) Specify the IP address set on a module to be connected (the IP address set with GX Works3 on the Ethernet
module).
Enable Password Select this checkbox to allow a password to be entered.
When "Connection enable" is selected in [Application Settings]  [Security]  [Certificate Configuration Tool] 
[Connection Control Setting] of GX Works3, password input is not required. Therefore, this checkbox can be left
unselected.
Password Set a password to be used for connection with 6 to 31 characters.
Show Password Specify whether to display the password as obscured text or normal text.
[Communication Test] button Tests whether a module can be connected and communications can be started with the current settings.
[OK] button Confirms the setting changes and closes the window.
[Cancel] button Discards the setting changes and closes the window.

Help
Displays the help and version information for Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
Item Description
Help Opens the help of Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
About Displays the version and license information for Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET. ( Page 92
Checking the software version)

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

86 8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
Server Certificates
Register and list the following items.
• Trusted certificate
• CRL (certificate revocation list)
Display imported items in a list, and select items in the list to delete.
Also, write registered certificate files into the Ethernet module, and read, compare, and delete certificate files from the module.

Item Description
Tool [Trusted Certificates] tab Displays the registered trusted root certificate and intermediate certificate in the certificate information list.
[CRLs] tab Displays the registered certificate revocation list in the certificate information list.
[Import] button Imports items (certificates or CRLs) to the certificate information list from files.
Multiple certificates (extension: cer, der, pem, or crl) or certificate revocation list (extension: crl) files can be
selected for import.
■If the [Trusted Certificates] tab is active
• X.509 certificate files in DER or PEM encoding format can be imported.
• The maximum binary encoding size of a supported certificate is 2048 bytes.
• The maximum number of certificates in the certificate information list is 20.
■If the [CRLs] tab is active
• X.509 certificate revocation list files in DER or PEM encoding format can be imported.
• The maximum binary encoding size of a supported CRL is 65535 bytes.
• The maximum number of CRLs in the certificate information list is 20. There is no limit for the number of
revocations in the certificate revocation list to be imported.
[Delete from List] button Deletes items (certificates and certificate revocation lists) from the certificate information list.
To delete them, click the [Delete from List] button or press the  key while the items in the certificate
information list are selected. (Multiple items can be selected for deletion.)
When deleting them from the trusted certificate list, if there is no other trusted certificates that have the
same identifier as the institution key identifier of the trusted certificate to be deleted, the certificate
revocation list with the same institution key identifier is also deleted from the certificate revocation list.
Certificate information list Lists the information selected on the [Trusted Certificates] tab or the [CRLs] tab.
Double-click an item in the certificate information list or select an item and press the  key to display the
certificate details in the standard Windows certificate dialog.

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET 87
 Item Description
Module [Trusted Certificates] tab Displays the trusted root certificate and intermediate certificate registered in the Ethernet module in the
certificate information list.
[CRLs] tab Displays the certificate revocation list registered in the Ethernet module in the certificate information list.
[Update] button Obtains items (certificates and certificate revocation lists) in the certificate information list from the Ethernet
module.
[Delete from List] button Deletes the selected items (certificates and certificate revocation lists) in the certificate information list from
the Ethernet module.
To delete them, click the [Delete from List] button or press the  key while the items in the certificate
information list are selected. (Multiple items can be selected for deletion.)
Certificate information list Lists the information selected on the [Trusted Certificates] tab or the [CRLs] tab.
Double-click an item in the certificate information list or select an item and press the  key to display the
certificate details in the standard Windows certificate dialog.
[Read] button Reads certificate files written in the Ethernet module.
The read trusted certificates or CRLs will be reflected to the certificate information lists of both the tool and
module.
[Verify] button Checks consistency between registered certificate files and certificate files written in the Ethernet module
and shows the check results.
[Write] button Writes certificate files registered in the certificate information list to the module.

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

88 8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
Items displayed on the list of certificates
The following table lists items displayed on the list of certificates.
: To be displayed, : Not to be displayed
Display item Trusted certificate CRL (certificate revocation list)
(Structure of X.509 v3 digital certificate)
Version  
Serial No.  
Signature Algorithm  
Publisher (verifier)*1 Common Name  
Organization Name  
Organization Unit  
Locality  
State  
Country  
Validity period Valid From  
Valid To  
Subject*1 Common Name  
Organization Name  
Organization Unit  
Locality  
State  
Country  
DNS Name  
URI  
8
IP Address  
Subject's public key information Public key algorithm  
Subject's public key  
Issuer identifier (reserved)  
Subject identifier (reserved)  
Extension (reserved)  

*1 This table lists items that can be displayed. There are other setting items than listed above.

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET 89
 Client Certificates
Manage client certificates in the Ethernet module that works as a client.
The current client certificates can be displayed and exported, and a CSR (certificate signature request) can be created.
Additionally, in the Ethernet module, a new client certificate (self-signed certificate) can be generated, and existing certificates
can be deleted and replaced.
The client certificate and corresponding private key are only stored in the Ethernet module. (They are not saved in a project
file.)

Item Description
Client certificate Lists client certificate information included in the Ethernet module.
information list Double-click an item in the client certificate information list or select an item and press the  key to display the certificate details
in the standard Windows certificate dialog.
[Generate a New Client Displays the "Generate a New Client Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)" window. (Page 91 "Generate a New Client Certificate
Certificate] button (Self-Signed Certificate)" window)
If a client certificate already exists on the Ethernet module, the new certificate overwrites it.
After the processing, client certificates are read from the Ethernet module and shown on the client certificate information list.
[Update] button Reads client certificates from the Ethernet module and shows them on the client certificate information list.
[Delete] button Deletes a client certificate file existing on the Ethernet module from the Ethernet module.
If the certificate function has been stopped, the function restarts after the deletion.
After the processing, client certificates are read from the Ethernet module and shown on the client certificate information list.
Last Refreshed Displays the last update date and time of the client certificate information list.
[Get a CSR] button Reads the CSR (certificate signature request) of the client certificate from the Ethernet module and saves the CSR file in PEM
encoded format with the specified file name and location.
[Replace] button Replaces the current client certificate file existing on the Ethernet module. This function is mainly used to replace a self-signed
certificate generated inside the Ethernet module with a CA signed certificate received after certificate signature request.
• X.509 certificate files in DER or PEM encoding format are supported.
• Certificate files (extension: cer, der, pem, or crt) can be selected.
• If a client certificate already exists on the Ethernet module, the new certificate overwrites it and appears on the client certificate
information list.
• The maximum binary length of a supported certificate is 2048 bytes.
• The public key of an existing client certificate in the Ethernet module must be the same as that of the selected certificate.
• If the certificate function has been stopped, the function restarts after the replacement.
• After the processing, client certificates are read from the Ethernet module and shown on the client certificate information list.
[Get a Certificate] button Reads the CSR (certificate signature request) of the client certificate from the Ethernet unit and saves the X.509 certificate file in
DER encoded format with the specified file name and location.

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

90 8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
"Generate a New Client Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)" window
The following figure shows the "Generate a New Client Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)" window.

Item Description Setting range

Common Name Enter the common name to be described in the certificate. 1 to 64 characters
One or more characters must be entered. (Default: Blank)
Organization Name Enter the organization name to be described in the certificate. 0 to 64 characters
(Default: Blank)
Organization Unit Enter the organizational unit name to be described in the certificate. 0 to 64 characters
(Default: Blank)
Locality Enter the locality name to be described in the certificate. 0 to 128 characters
8
(Default: Blank)
State Enter the state or province name to be described in the certificate. 0 to 128 characters
(Default: Blank)
Country Enter the country name to be described in the certificate. Blank or two one-byte letters
An entered value must be within the setting range. (upper-case character or lower-
case character)
(Default: Blank)
RSA Key Strength Select an RSA key length. • 1024 bits
• 2048 bits
(Default: 2048 bits)
Signature Algorithm Select a signature algorithm. • SHA-1
• SHA-256
(Default: SHA-256)
Certificate Validity Select a validity period of the certificate. • 1 day
• 1 week
• 1 month
• 1 year
• 2 years
• 10 years
(Default: 1 year)
[Generate] button Requests the Ethernet module to generate a client certificate (self-signed certificate) with 
the specified contents.
• The [Generate] button is disabled until "Common Name" is specified.
• If the certificate function has been stopped, the function restarts after the certificate
generation.
[Cancel] button Closes this window to quit the processing. 

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET 91
 Precautions
• The certificate may not be generated depending on the total length of data entered in "Subject" (excluding "Country").
The maximum allowed data length varies depending on the RSA encryption key length.
UTF-8 encoding applies to "Subject". The following table lists the maximum allowed data lengths.
RSA encryption key length Maximum data length
1024 bits 640 bytes
2048 bits 510 bytes

In UTF-8 encoding, an ASCII character occupies one byte. However, a Japanese or other character that belongs to the
Unicode basic multilingual plane occupies three bytes.
• When a new client certificate is generated, the validity period begins one day before the creation date.
• When a certificate is generated while the module is communicating, the communication speed may decrease. Also,
certificate generation may take time.

Checking the software version

The software version of Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET can be checked from the screen below.
[Help]  [About]

8 APPLICABLE ENGINEERING TOOL

92 8.1 Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET
9 PROGRAMMING
9
This chapter describes program examples of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
For the program example of the general-purpose Ethernet, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Communication)

9.1 Interlock Programs of Cyclic Transmission

When creating a cyclic transmission program, configure an interlock such that the processing is performed when normal cyclic
transmission between the master station and remote stations is performed.

Program using labels

A program using labels is provided below.

Labels used in the program

Classification Label name Description Device
Module label FX5ENET_1.bnSts_uval_Various_states_D[0] Cyclic transmission status U1\G4160.b0
FX5ENET_1.bnSts_CyclicTransmission_Station_D[1] Cyclic transmission status of each U1\G4100.b0
station (station No.1)
FX5ENET_1.bnSts_CyclicTransmission_Station_D[2] Cyclic transmission status of each U1\G4100.b1
station (station No.2)
Label to be Define global labels as shown below.
defined

9 PROGRAMMING
9.1 Interlock Programs of Cyclic Transmission 93
 Program example

Communication program with station No.1

Communication program with station No.2

9 PROGRAMMING
94 9.1 Interlock Programs of Cyclic Transmission
Program using buffer memory
A program using buffer memory is provided below. 9
Buffer memory used in the program
Buffer memory Description
U1\G4160.b0 Cyclic transmission status
U1\G4100.b0 Cyclic transmission status of each station (station No.1)
U1\G4100.b1 Cyclic transmission status of each station (station No.2)

Program example

Communication program with station No.1

Communication program with station No.2

9 PROGRAMMING
9.1 Interlock Programs of Cyclic Transmission 95
 10 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains an explanation of errors that may occur during communication between FX5-ENET and other devices,
and troubleshooting for such errors.

10.1 Checking with LEDs

This section describes troubleshooting using the LEDs.
The error status can be determined by the status of the RUN LED and ERROR LED.
RUN LED ERROR LED Error status*1 Description
Off On, flashing Major error An error such as hardware failure or memory failure. The module stops
operating.
On Flashing Moderate error An error caused by an abnormal parameter affecting the module operation.
The module stops operating.
On On Minor error An error caused by improper or inconsistent configuration. The module
continues operating.

*1 When multiple errors occur, the error status is displayed in the order of major, moderate, and minor.

When the RUN LED turns off

When the RUN LED turns off after the FX5-ENET is powered on, check the following.
Check item Action
Is the FX5-ENET mounted correctly? Securely mount the FX5-ENET on the CPU module.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the hardware test to check for FX5-ENET failure. ( Page 106
Hardware Test)

When the ERROR LED turns on or is flashing

When the ERROR LED turns on or is flashing, check the following.
Check item Action
Does any error occur in the module diagnostics? Take the actions displayed in the module diagnostics. ( Page 97 Module
diagnostics)

When SD/RD LED turns off (When data cannot be sent/received)

When the SD/RD LED turns off and the data cannot be sent or received, check the following.
Check item Action
Is the ERROR LED on or flashing? Take the actions displayed in the module diagnostics. ( Page 97 Module
diagnostics)
Is the Ethernet cable connected correctly? Connect the Ethernet cable again.
Are the parameter settings correct? Review the details of the GX Works3 settings.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the hardware test to check for FX5-ENET failure. ( Page 106
Hardware Test)

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
96 10.1 Checking with LEDs
10.2 Checking the Module Status
The status of FX5-ENET module can be checked by the following methods.
• Module diagnostics
• Ethernet diagnostics
• Checking the buffer memory
10
• Event history function

Module diagnostics
The following functions can be used in the "Module Diagnostics" window for the FX5-ENET.
Function Application
Error Information Displays the details of the errors currently occurring.
Click the [Event History] button to check the history of errors that have occurred on the FX5-ENET, errors detected for
each module.
Module Information List Displays various status information of the FX5-ENET.

Error Information
Check the details of the error currently occurring and action to eliminate the error.

Item Description
Status Major: An error such as hardware failure or memory failure. The module stops operating.
Moderate: An error, such as parameter error, which affects module operation. The module stops operating.
Minor: An error such as communication failure. The module continues operating.
Detailed Information Displays detailed information about each error (maximum of three pieces).
Cause Displays the detailed error causes.
Corrective Action Displays the actions to eliminate the error causes.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 Checking the Module Status 97
 Module Information List
Switch to the [Module Information List] tab to check various status information of the FX5-ENET.

Item Description
LED information (Module) Displays the status of the RUN LED and ERROR LED of the FX5-ENET.
LED information (Communication)*1 Displays the status of the D LINK of the FX5-ENET.
Setting information*1 IP Address (1st Octet) Displays the IP address of the FX5-ENET.
IP Address (2nd Octet)
IP Address (3rd Octet)
IP Address (4th Octet)
MAC Address (1st Octet) Displays the MAC address of the FX5-ENET.
MAC Address (2nd Octet)
MAC Address (3rd Octet)
MAC Address (4th Octet)
MAC Address (5th Octet)
MAC Address (6th Octet)

*1 An undefined value is stored during hardware test.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
98 10.2 Checking the Module Status
Ethernet diagnostics
To check the status of general-purpose Ethernet, parameter setting and communication status, perform the "Ethernet
Diagnostics" of GX Works3.
[Diagnostics]  [Ethernet Diagnostics]  Select the "Module" in the [Target Module Specification].
10

The following functions can be used in the "Ethernet Diagnostics" window for the FX5-ENET.
Function Application
Status of Each Connection Displays information concerning status of each connection.
Status of Each Protocol Displays the total of the send/receive of the packet etc. for each protocol.
Connection Status Monitors connection status.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 Checking the Module Status 99
 Status of Each Connection
The status of each connection of the FX5-ENET selected.
[Diagnostics]  [Ethernet Diagnostics]  Select the "Module" in the [Target Module Specification].  Select the [Status
of Each Connection] tab.

Item Description
Connection No./Function Displays the connection number and functions.
Host Station Port No. Displays the own station port number used.
Communication Destination Communication Method Displays the communication method.
Communication Destination IP Address Displays the IP address of the sensor/device to be connected, which is set in the parameter
settings.*1
Communication Destination Port No. Displays the port number of the sensor/device to be connected, which is set in the parameter
settings.*1
Latest Error Code Displays the error code that indicates the definition of latest error occurred.
Protocol Displays the protocol (TCP/IP, TLS, or UDP/IP).
Open System Displays the open method (Active, Unpassive, or Fullpassive) when the protocol of the connection
is TCP/IP.
TCP Status Displays the status (open status) of connection with the sensor/device when the protocol of the
connection status is TCP/IP.
Remote Password Status Not supported.
Continuous Unlock Lost Counts Not supported.

*1 For connections used by the e-mail function or the MQTT communication function, the communication destination IP address and port
number configured in the parameter settings of each function are displayed. However, if the communication destination is set as a host
name, "----" is displayed for the communication destination IP address.
Click the [Clear Latest Error Code] button to clear all the errors displayed in "Latest Error Code" of each connection.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
100 10.2 Checking the Module Status
Status of Each Protocol
The total number of packets sent/received by each protocol of the selected FX5-ENET can be checked.
[Diagnostics]  [Ethernet Diagnostics]  Select the "Module" in the [Target Module Specification].  Select the [Status
of Each Protocol] tab.
10

Item Description Display range

Total Number of Receives Displays the total number of received packets. 0 to 4294967295
Total Number of Sends Displays the total number of sent packets. 0 to 4294967295
Total Number of Sum Check Error Cancels Not supported. 
Total Number of Echo Request Receives Displays the total number of received ICMP echo request packets. 0 to 4294967295
Total Number of Echo Reply Sends Displays the total number of sent ICMP echo reply packets. 0 to 4294967295
Total Number of Echo Request Sends Displays the total number of sent ICMP echo request packets. 0 to 4294967295
Total Number of Echo Reply Receives Displays the total number of received ICMP echo reply packets. 0 to 4294967295

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 Checking the Module Status 101
 Connection Status
The communication status of the FX5-ENET.
[Diagnostics]  [Ethernet Diagnostics]  Select the "Module" in the [Target Module Specification].  Select the
[Connection Status] tab.

Item Description Display range

Communication Status Full Duplex/Half Duplex Displays the communication mode of the line. 
Connection Status Displays the cable connection status. 
Communication Rate Displays the communication speed. 
Number of Disconnections Not supported. 
Broadcast Maximum Size of Detection Not supported. 
Amount of Data per Unit Time (Latest) Not supported. 
Amount of Data per Unit Time Not supported. 
(Maximum)

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
102 10.2 Checking the Module Status
Checking the buffer memory
The buffer memory can be used to check for errors that have occurred in FX5-ENET.

Module error
If an error occurs in FX5-ENET, check the following buffer memory areas. 10
Buffer memory address Buffer memory name Description
Un\G29 Latest error code Stores the latest error code.
Un\G158 Initial status It is possible to confirm whether the initialization is normally completed.
Un\G159 Initial abnormal code An error code will be stored when the initialization is abnormally completed.

For the stored error code, refer to  Page 111 Module error.

Ethernet communication error

If an error occurs during general-purpose Ethernet communication, the error code will be stored in the following buffer
memory.
Buffer memory address Buffer memory name Description
Un\G108 to Un\G139 Error code Stores the error code of each connection (1 to 32).

For the stored error code, refer to  Page 119 Ethernet communication error.

Event history function

This function collects errors from FX5-ENET, and keeps them in the SD memory card, and data memory or battery backed
built-in RAM of the CPU module.
The event information collected by the CPU module can be displayed on GX Works3 to check the occurrence history in
chronological order.
Event type Classification Description
System Error An error detected by the self diagnostics in FX5-ENET.

For event code, refer to  Page 125 List of Event Code.

Setting procedure
The event history function can be set from the event history setting window of GX Works3. For the setting procedure, refer to
the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Application)

Displaying event history

Access the menu of GX Works3. For details on the operating procedure and how to view the contents, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 Checking the Module Status 103
 10.3 Checking the Network Status
The status of the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic network can be confirmed with the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
diagnostics.

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Diagnostics

Perform troubleshooting by executing the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics of GX Works3 and checking the
network status and error details.
[Diagnostics]  [CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics]

The status of the master station is checked in "Master Station Status".

The network status including remote stations is checked in "Network Status".
Item Description
Target Module Specification The diagnostics information of the selected module is displayed.
Total Slave (Parameter) The total number of remote stations set in parameter is displayed.
IP Address The IP address of the master station is displayed. The display can be switched between decimals and
hexadecimals in "Change IP Address Display".
Error Code The error code of the master station is displayed. ( Page 110 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic error)
[Error Details] button The description of the error and the actions to be taken are displayed.
Link Scan Time/Error Stations Displays link scan time (present, maximum, minimum) and number of error stations/unfixed stations of each
group.
Error stations (Error Stns) and unfixed stations (Unfixed Stns) refers the following state.
• Error Stns: Stations where an error has been occurred
• Unfixed Stns: Stations (not including reserved stations) where the transmission status has not been fixed

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
104 10.3 Checking the Network Status
Item Description
Diagnostics Target Group Select a group to be the diagnostics target.
Station No. The station number of the remote station is displayed.
Occpd Stns The number of occupied stations set in parameter is displayed.
Reserved Station The reserved station status set in parameter is displayed.
IP Address The IP address set in parameter is displayed.
"-" is displayed when the station is a reserved station and an IP address has not been set.
10
Transmission Status The transmission status of the remote station is displayed.
• Unfixed: Communications with the master station not established*1
• Transmitting: Cyclic transmission being performed
• Disconnecting: Disconnected from the master station
Disconnections The accumulated number of disconnection detection is displayed.
• 0: No disconnections
• 1 to 65535: Number of disconnection detection (accumulated number)*2
Time-out Count The accumulated number of timeouts is displayed.
0: No timeouts
1 to 65535: Number of timeouts (accumulated number)*2
The Latest Error The latest error code of an error which has occurred in a remote station is displayed. When the remote station is
disconnected, an error occurs. After that, even when the disconnected remote station returns to the system, the
error is held. When another error occurs, the latest error will be updated (overwritten).
The detailed errors of the remote station cannot be confirmed with the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
diagnostics. Confirm errors occurring in the remote station with the value stored in 'Diagnostic information 2'
(Un\G4144 to Un\G4159). ( Page 157 Diagnostic information 2)
Error Details... The description of the error and the actions to be taken are displayed.
[Clear Latest Error Code] button The error code is cleared.*3 The button can be clicked only during monitoring.

*1 The possible reasons include that the remote station set in parameter has not started up, a cable between the master station and the
remote station is disconnected, or the setting of an IP address or a subnet mask of the master/remote station is incorrect.
*2 When the count exceeds 65535, counting is continued from 1 again.
*3 Take actions and eliminate the error cause first. Then, clear the error code.

The following indicates that the disconnection has occurred due to no cyclic transmission caused by the cable
disconnection of the master station side. In this case, the previous cyclic transmission time (just before the
disconnection) is displayed on the link scan time.
• "CFE8" is displayed as the latest error for all remote stations. (No response received from a remote station)
• "No Error" is displayed on the error code of the master station.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.3 Checking the Network Status 105
 10.4 Hardware Test
This section describes how to perform a test related to hardware, such as a ROM/RAM of the FX5-ENET.

• During the hardware test, values in the buffer memory cannot be referred from the GX Works3 or the
program.
• Do not change the operating status of the CPU module during the hardware test. If the operating status of
the CPU module is changed, the module major error occurs in the CPU module.

Operating procedure
1. Set the FX5-ENET to the hardware test mode using the GX Works3.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-ENET]  [Indispensable Setting]  [Mode Settings]
 Select "Hardware Test"

2. When a cable is connected to the Ethernet port of FX5-ENET, disconnect it.

3. Set the CPU module (FX5-ENET) to the STOP state and write parameters.

4. Power off and on the system or reset the CPU module (FX5-ENET).

5. The hardware test is automatically executed.

The following table shows the LED indications of the FX5-ENET for the hardware test.
Status RUN LED ERROR LED
During hardware test execution Flashing Off
Hardware test completed successfully On Off
Hardware test completed with an error On On

6. When the test completed successfully, set the FX5-ENET to online mode using the GX Works3.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-ENET]  [Indispensable Setting]  [Mode Settings]
 Select "Online"
Write parameters and power off and on the system or reset the CPU module (FX5-ENET).
7. When the test completed with an error, check that adequate measures to reduce noise are taken for the programmable
controller system and retry the hardware test. If the test still completes with an error, a hardware failure may have
occurred on the FX5-ENET. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
106 10.4 Hardware Test
10.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom
The troubleshooting measures for each symptom during CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are shown below. If an error has
occurred in the FX5-ENET, identify the error cause using the GX Works3. ( Page 97 Checking the Module Status)

When the diagnostics function does not start 10

If the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics does not start, check the following.
Check item Action
Is the master station power on? Turn on the power for the CPU module connected to the master station.

When the transmission status is disconnected or unfixed

If the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics transmission state is disconnected or not established, check the following.

■Ethernet
Check item Action
Are the IP address and subnet mask of the master station/remote stations Check and correct the IP address and subnet mask of the master station/
correctly set? remote stations.
Is the IP address already in use? Set a unique IP address to the master station/remote stations.
Is there any device having the same IP address as the master station/remote
stations within the same network address?*1
Is the same network address set to the master station and remote stations? • Check and correct the IP address and subnet mask so that the network
addresses of the master station and remote stations match.
• Check and correct the subnet mask of the master station and remote
stations so that they match as normal values.
Is the access blocked? Check the security settings such as a firewall.
Is any access from remote stations blocked in "IP Filter Settings" of the master Allow the access from the IP address of the corresponding remote station.
station.
Before an error was detected, has any device on the line, such as the master If a device (master station, remote station, hub, etc.) on the line was replaced
station, remote station, or hub, been replaced with a device having the same with a new device having the same IP address, take one of the following
IP address as that of the device before replacement? actions.
• Wait until the ARP cache is updated. (The waiting time varies depending on
the device.)*2
• Restart all devices on the line.

*1 There may be cases when duplicated master stations or duplicated remote stations are not detected as an error.
*2 Devices on Ethernet have a table of IP addresses and their corresponding MAC address, called the ARP cache. When a device on the
line is replaced with a device having the same IP address, the MAC address in the ARP cache becomes different from that of the
replaced device. This may cause incorrect data communications. The ARP cache is updated by resetting a device or after a certain time
has elapsed. The time varies depending on the device.

■CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Check item Action
Are the devices specified in the refresh settings for the master station correct? Check and correct the refresh settings.
Are the devices specified in the refresh settings for the master station used in Check the settings and programs for the master station/remote stations, and
other applications? correct them if they are incorrect.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom 107
 When cyclic data cannot be read/written from/to the remote station correctly
If the cyclic data cannot be read in correctly even though the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics state is transmitting,
check the following.

■CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Check item Action
Is the IP address for the master station/remote station set correctly? Correct the IP address of the master station/remote station.
Have the IP address settings been changed between devices?
Is the IP address set in duplicate? Change the master station/remote station IP addresses so they are not
duplicated.
Is there a device with the same IP address as the master station/remote
station on the same segment?*1
Are the devices specified in the refresh settings for the master station correct? Check and correct the refresh settings.
Are the devices specified in the refresh settings for the master station used in Check the settings and programs for the master station/remote stations, and
other applications? correct them if they are incorrect.
Is the remote station specified as a reserved station in "Network Configuration Cancel the reserved station setting. ( Page 71 )
Settings" of the master station?
Has the accumulated number of timeouts of the remote station considered Check Page 108 When a station is repeatedly disconnected and
abnormal been counted up?*2 reconnected and take actions.
Has the accumulated number of disconnection detection of the remote station
considered abnormal been counted up?*2

*1 There may be cases when duplicated master stations or duplicated remote stations are not detected as an error.
*2 The accumulated number of timeouts and the accumulated number of disconnection detection can be checked in diagnostic information
1.

When a station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected

If the transmission state repeatedly changes from disconnected and return, check the following.

■Ethernet
Check item Action
Are the Ethernet cables inserted to each slot until they click? • Lock the Ethernet cables securely.
• Check that the Ethernet cables are correctly connected to the external
devices and hubs.
Do the used cables conform to the Ethernet standard? Check the specifications of the Ethernet cables used.
Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Replace the disconnected Ethernet cable.
Is there any source of noise near the Ethernet cables? Keep the Ethernet cables away from the source of noise. Or, use the cables
resistant to noise.
Does any error occur in the external device, hub or router? Take actions, referring to the manual for the device having an error.
Is the hub used applicable to the communication speed of the connected Replace the hub with the one corresponding to the master station/remote
master station/remote station? station communication speed.
Does the general-purpose Ethernet function (socket communication) respond • Stop the function. Or, modify settings. For example, extend the execution
quickly? Does it return an error response or no response? interval and decrease the execution frequency of the function.
• Change UDP/IP communications to TCP/IP communications, or add resend
processing.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
108 10.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom
■CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Check item Action
Is the timeout time setting of the master station too short? Increase the timeout time of the master station.
Are there any remote stations having an error? Perform troubleshooting for the remote station having an error.
Is the line load high? Lower the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication frequency, and
lower the line load. 10
Is CC-Link IE Field Network Basic being simultaneously executed at a Separate the network and configure two CC-Link IE Field Network Basic lines.
different network address on the same line?
Are data communications with other Ethernet devices being performed on the Separate the network for other Ethernet devices from the CC-Link IE Field
same line? Network Basic line and configure the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic line.
Is any of the following function being executed? Stop the function. Or, modify settings. For example, extend the execution
• Access from GX Works3 (such as ladder monitor) interval, decrease the execution frequency, or reduce the range of the
• Latch function function.
• Data logging function

When the link scan time delays

If the link scan time is slow, refer to  Page 108 When a station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected.

When cyclic transmission of the master station stops

If the master station's cyclic transmission stops, check the following.
Check item Action
Is the transmission status of remote stations normal? • If there are any disconnected remote stations, take actions according to the
error details.
• If there are no disconnected remote stations, check the network connection.
A problem may be occurring from a device other than those set in the
master station.

Troubleshooting for the MQTT communication function

When any problem occurs in relation to the MQTT communication function, check the following.
Check item Action
Is the interval by which to call FB: MQTT_Receive too long? Adjust the call interval of FB: MQTT_Receive.
Do the publisher and the subscriber use the same message format? Ensure that the publisher and the subscriber use the same message format.
Is there any problem with the network environment or the server? Solve any problem with the network environment or the server.
Is an identical client ID used for multiple devices? Ensure that an identical client ID is not used.
Does any of the following problems occur? Check the cause and make a modification if any problem exists.
• Cable failure
• Cable connection destination
• IP address setting
• IP address duplication on the network
• Is "Connection Control Setting" for "Certificate Configuration Tool" set to
"Connection disable" in the Ethernet module?
• Do multiple tools attempt to connect simultaneously?
Is the communication speed slow? Reduce the communication load of other applications on the same
communication line, or separate the communication line.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom 109
 10.6 List of Error Codes
This section lists the error codes, error details and causes, and actions for the errors that occur in the processing for data
communications between the FX5-ENET and external devices or that are caused by processing requests from the CPU
module on the own station.
The FX5-ENET has the following error codes.
Type Error code Reference
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic error CFC0H to CFF0H Page 110
Module error 0800H to 480EH Page 111
Ethernet communication error C012H to CFBFH Page 119

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic error

If an error occurs with CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, the error code can be confirmed with CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
diagnostics. ( Page 104 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Diagnostics) The error codes are stored in 'Latest error code'
(Un\G29).
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
CFC0H Cyclic transmission error Multiple master stations are on the same Confirm the master station on the network.
(master station) network address so that cyclic transmission
cannot be executed.
CFC1H Cyclic transmission error An error occurs during cyclic transmission • Take measures to reduce noise.
(master station) so that cyclic transmission cannot be • If the error is displayed again after re-execution, please consult
executed. your local Mitsubishi representative.
CFC8H Cyclic transmission error There is a remote stations that is controlled • Confirm the master station on the network.
(master station) by the other master station so that cyclic • Confirm the remote station with error.
transmission cannot be executed.
CFC9H Cyclic transmission error There is a remote station that has the same • Confirm the remote station on the network.
(master station) IP address on the same network address so • Confirm the remote station with error.
that cyclic transmission cannot be
executed.
CFD0H Master station error The port number (61450) used by CC-Link Recheck the port number used in the Ethernet function.
IE Field Network Basic is already in use.
CFD1H Master station error An incorrect value is set by the subnet Correct parameter shown in cause.
mask.
CFE0H Cyclic transmission error Cyclic transmission is executed for the • Confirm the master station on the network.
(remote station) remote station that is controlled by the other • Confirm the remote station with error.
master station.
CFE1H Cyclic transmission error The master station specifies the number of Recheck the number of occupied stations setting of the parameter
(remote station) occupied stations that cannot be handled. of the master station (network configuration setting).
CFE8H Cyclic transmission error No response from the remote station. • Recheck the disconnection detection setting of the remote
(remote station) station of the parameter of the master station (network
configuration setting).
• Confirm the remote station on the network.
• Confirm the disconnection remote station.
• Take measures to reduce noise.
CFE9H Cyclic transmission error There is a remote station that has the same Confirm the remote station with error.
(remote station) IP address on the same network address.
CFF0H Remote station error An error occurs in the remote station. Confirm the remote station with error.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
110 10.6 List of Error Codes
Module error
Error codes when a module error occurs are classified into major error, moderate error, and minor error, and can be checked
in the [Error Information] tab of the "Module Diagnostics" window of the FX5-ENET. ( Page 97 Module diagnostics) The
error codes are stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G29).
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action 10
0800H Link-down Link-down due to disconnection of the • Check the operation of the external device.
network cable connected to an external • Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
device.
0904H Socket communication Socket communication send message has • Check the operation of the external device.
sending failure failed. • Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
0910H Ethernet port error Data cannot be sent to the external device. • Check the operation of the external device.
• Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
• The line may be flooded with packets. Retry after a while.
• The receiving area of the external device may be full (the
window size of TCP is small). Confirm whether the receiving
processing is performed on the external device side or
unnecessary data is not sent from the FX5-ENET.
• Confirm whether the subnet mask pattern and default router IP
address are set correctly on the FX5-ENET and external device
or the IP address class is correct.
0911H Ethernet port error Communication with the external device • Check the operation of the external device.
was interrupted. • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
• This error may occur when the connection under communication
is forcibly invalidated. In this case, there is no problem. Re-
connect.
0912H Ethernet port error System error or connection connecting error • Check the operation of the external device.
in OS (Malfunction due to noise or hardware • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
trouble may have occurred.) lines to the external devices.
• This error may occur when the connection under communication
is forcibly invalidated. In this case, there is no problem. Re-
connect.
0913H Ethernet port error The external device cannot be connected or • Check the operation of the external device.
is disconnected. • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
• If this error occurs during communication, retry after a while.
0920H Certificate expiration The certificate is set to expire within 90 Renew the client certificate by the time of expiration.
days.
1080H ROM write count error The number of writes to ROM exceeded Replace the module.
100000. (Number of writes > 100000)
1081H Number of built-in data The number of writes to the built-in data Replace the Ethernet module.
flash writes exceeded flash exceeded 100000.
1810H IP address change failure IP address change fails. Execute the IP address change function again.
1811H to Parameter write failure An error occurred when writing parameters. If using Certificate Configuration tool for FX5-ENET, write the
1812H server certificate again.
1813H E-mail setting change The e-mail setting change failed. Execute the e-mail setting change function again.
failure
1814H DNS setting change The DNS setting change failed. Execute the DNS setting change function again.
failure
1815H E-mail sending failure or • The e-mail setting change function was • Check that no e-mail is being sent and then execute the function
E-mail setting change executed while an e-mail was being sent. again.
failure • An e-mail was sent while the e-mail • Check that the e-mail setting change function is not running and
setting change function was running. then send the e-mail again.
1816H E-mail setting change The value set with the e-mail setting change Recheck the setting value of the e-mail setting change.
setting value out of range is outside the range.
1817H DNS setting change The value set with the DNS setting change Recheck the setting value of the DNS setting change.
setting value out of range is outside the range.
1818H E-mail setting change The TLS setting value set with the e-mail Recheck the TLS setting value of the e-mail setting change.
setting value out of range setting change is outside the range.
(TLS setting)
1819H Certificate tool setting The certificate tool setting change failed. Execute the certificate tool setting change function again.
change failure

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 111
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
181AH Certificate tool setting The value set with the certificate tool setting Recheck the setting value of the certificate tool setting change.
change setting value out change is outside the range.
of range
181BH MQTT connection setting The MQTT connection setting change failed. Execute the MQTT connection setting change function again.
change failure
181CH MQTT connection setting The value set with the MQTT connection Recheck the setting value of the MQTT connection setting change.
change setting value out setting change is outside the range.
of range
181DH MQTT connection setting The TLS setting value set with the MQTT Recheck TLS setting value of the MQTT connection setting
change setting value out connection setting change is outside the change.
of range (TLS setting) range.
181EH MQTT connection setting The client port number value set in the Recheck the setting value of the client port number for the MQTT
change setting value out MQTT connection setting change is outside connection setting change.
of range (client port the range.
number setting)
181FH E-mail sending failure An e-mail sending process (TLS setting) is Ensure that no writing process in Certificate Configuration Tool for
(TLS setting) executed while writing in Certificate FX5-ENET is in progress, then execute again.
Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET is in
progress.
1852H Out-of-range setting error The property value set in the buffer memory Confirm that an incorrect value is not stored.
is incorrect.
1861H Excess of sent packet The data in the transmitted packet exceeded • Check the settings for the BACnet device of the communication
size the size that can be transmitted by one destination.
packet. • Confirm the causes of increase in packet size.
1870H Received protocol version The protocol version of NPDU was not 1. • Check the specifications of the communication destination
error device.
• Check the communication packet.
1871H Received BVLL (BVLC Unsupported BVLL (BVLC type) was • Check the communication packet.
type) error received. • Please confirm with the manufacturer of the communication
destination device.
1872H Received BVLL (BVLC Unsupported BVLL (BVLC function) was • Check the communication packet.
function) error received. • Please confirm with the manufacturer of the communication
destination device.
1873H Received DNET error 0 was specified for DNET of the received • Check the specifications of the communication destination
packet. device.
• Check the communication packet.
1874H Received SNET error 0 or 65535 was specified for SNET of the • Check the specifications of the communication destination
received packet. device.
• Check the communication packet.
1875H Received SLEN error 0 was specified for SLEN of the received • Check the specifications of the communication destination
packet. device.
• Check the communication packet.
1876H Packet decoding error An error occurred during packet decoding. • Check the communication packet.
• Please confirm with the manufacturer of the communication
destination device.
1877H Receipt of message that SimpleAck, ComplexAck, SegmentAck, • Check the communication packet.
is not supposed to be Error response, Reject response, or Abort • Please confirm with the manufacturer of the communication
received response was received. destination device.
1900H Hardware error A memory check error has occurred. • Execute the IP address change function again.
• If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1901H to Hardware error A memory check error has occurred. • Execute the hardware test.
1902H • If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1905H Flash memory check error A flash memory check error (Tool setting Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
change function sector) has occurred. error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
If the write operation from the buffer memory still does not resolve
the problem, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
112 10.6 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
1906H Flash memory check error A flash memory check error (Trusted Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
certificate parameter sector) has occurred. error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
If the write operation from Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-
ENET still does not resolve the problem, please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
1907H Flash memory check error A built-in data flash memory check error Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
10
(Module's certificate parameter sector) has error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
occurred. possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
If the write operation from Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-
ENET still does not resolve the problem, please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
1910H Flash memory check error A flash memory check error (E-mail setting Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
change function sector) has occurred. error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
1911H Flash memory check error A flash memory check error (DNS setting Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
change function sector) has occurred. error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
1912H Flash memory check error A flash memory check error (MQTT setting Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
change function sector) has occurred. error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the Ethernet module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
1920H*1 IP address change failure IP address setting or other (Un\G50 to Correct the IP address setting or other (Un\G50 to Un\G55) value.
Un\G55) value exceeds the setting range.
1921H*2 IP address change failure Write request and Clear request (Un\G56 Check if Write request and Clear request (Un\G56 and Un\G58)
and Un\G58) turned from off to on turned from off to on simultaneously.
simultaneously.
1930H E-mail setting change A value of the E-mail send function Recheck the values of the E-mail send function (Un\G4174 to
execution error (Un\G4174 to Un\G4369) is outside the Un\G4369).
setting range.
1931H E-mail setting change E-mail setting storage area write request Check if E-mail setting storage area write request (Un\G4370) and
execution error (Un\G4370) and E-mail setting storage area E-mail setting storage area clear request (Un\G4372) turned from
clear request (Un\G4372) turned from off to off to on simultaneously.
on simultaneously.
1940H Error during execution of A value in DNS setting (Un\G4390 to Recheck the values in DNS setting (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397).
DNS setting change Un\G4397) is outside the setting range.
1941H Error during execution of DNS setting storage area write request Check if DNS setting storage area write request (Un\G4398) and
DNS setting change (Un\G4398) and DNS setting storage area DNS setting storage area clear request (Un\G4400) turned from
clear request (Un\G4400) turned from off to off to on simultaneously.
on simultaneously.
1960H E-mail sending error The destination address corresponding to Check that the destination address corresponding to the ON
the ON specfied bit in the preset destination specfied bit is set and execute the function again.
address instruction is not set.
1961H E-mail sending error The number of characters for the destination Check the number of characters of the destination address and
address has exceeded the maximum value. execute the function again.
1962H E-mail sending error The number of characters for the subject Check the number of characters of the subject and execute the
has exceeded the maximum value. function again.
1963H E-mail sending error The number of characters for the message Check the number of characters of the message body and execute
body has exceeded the maximum value. the function again.
1964H E-mail sending error The destination address is not set. Check that the preset destination address or the destination
address is set and execute the function again.
1965H E-mail sending error • A UTF-8 conversion data error has • Check the specified Unicord string and execute again.
occurred. • Check the size specification for the e-mail subject or message
• Incorrect data size specification has text.
occurred.
1968H E-mail sending error The number of message body characters • Check if the number of message body characters and the
and the number of message body data do number of message body data characters match.
not match. • If the NULL code (00H) is included in the middle of the message
body data, set the number of message body characters before
the NULL code.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 113
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
1970H to E-mail sending error An error is detected while an e-mail is being • Check that there is no error in the set connection number.
1976H sent. (The connection number specified in the e-mail server connection
device with the external device configuration is specified by
another function.)
• Execute the write to program again.
If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1980H Error during execution of A value in 'MQTT connection setting' Recheck the values in 'MQTT connection setting' (Un\G108808 to
MQTT connection setting (Un\G108808 to Un\G108823) is outside the Un\G108823).
change range.
1981H Error during execution of 'Tool setting storage area write request' Check if 'Tool setting storage area write request' (Un\G108872)
MQTT connection setting (Un\G108872) and 'Tool setting storage and 'Tool setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108874) turned
change area clear request' (Un\G108874) turned from off to on simultaneously.
from off to on simultaneously.
1990H Error during execution of A value in 'Tool setting' (Un\G108879 to Recheck the values in 'Tool setting' (Un\G108879 to Un\G108895).
certificate tool setting Un\G108895) is outside the range.
change
1991H Error during execution of 'Tool setting storage area write request' Check if 'Tool setting storage area write request' (Un\G108872)
certificate tool setting (Un\G108872) and 'Tool setting storage and 'Tool setting storage area clear request' (Un\G108874) turned
change area clear request' (Un\G108874) turned from off to on simultaneously.
from off to on simultaneously.
1D80H Error during execution of An instruction other than executable Check that the dedicated instruction is executable. If it is not
dedicated instruction dedicated instruction numbers has been executable, correct it.
specified.
1D83H Error during execution of The dedicated instruction request data from • Execute the write to program again.
dedicated instruction the CPU module was discarded because • If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
the data size was abnormal. possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1D84H Error during execution of The dedicated instruction request data from • Execute the write to program again.
dedicated instruction the CPU module cannot be normally input. • If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1D85H Error during execution of A timeout error occurred in the dedicated • Reset the CPU module, and execute it again.
dedicated instruction instruction response data, and the data was • If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
discarded. possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1DC4H IP address change failure IP address change fails. • Execute the IP address change function again.
• If the error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module on which the
error occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
1F00H MELSOFT A communication error occurred in • Check the number of connected connections in the whole
communication error MELSOFT connection. MELSOFT connection.
• Check the number of UDP connections in the MELSOFT
connection.
2160H IP address duplication Overlapping IP addresses were detected. Correct the IP address.
detection
2C80H Parameter error A parameter error was detected in the • Check the external device configuration settings in the FX5-
external device configuration. ENET module parameters.
• If the same error is displayed again, the abnormal module may
have a hardware problem. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
114 10.6 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
2C81H Parameter error • A parameter error was detected in the • Check the external device configuration settings in the FX5-
external device configuration. ENET module parameters.
• A parameter that is not supported by the • Set so that the sum of the number of connections in external
firmware version of the FX5-ENET device configuration and the number of settings in the simple
module is set. CPU communication settings is 32 or less.
• If the same error is displayed again, the abnormal module may
have a hardware problem. Please consult your local Mitsubishi 10
representative.
• Check the firmware version of the FX5-ENET module. If a set
parameter is not supported, update the firmware version or
correct the parameter setting.
2C82H Parameter error A parameter error was detected in the • Check the external device configuration settings in the FX5-
external device configuration. ENET module parameters.
• If the same error is displayed again, the abnormal module may
have a hardware problem. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
2CF0H CPU module error An error of CPU module was detected. Check the details of the error of the CPU module with the module
diagnostics of GX Works3, and take measures.
2DA0H to Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the number of connected
2DA1H configuration was detected. units in external device configuration in the FX5-ENET module
parameters.
2DA2H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the communication method
configuration was detected. in external device configuration in the FX5-ENET module
parameters.
2DA3H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the protocol in external
configuration was detected. device configuration in the FX5-ENET module parameters.
2DA4H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the model name in external
configuration was detected. device configuration in the FX5-ENET module parameters.
2DA5H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the fixed buffer transmission
configuration was detected. in external device configuration in the FX5-ENET module
parameters.
2DA6H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the IP address in external
configuration was detected. device configuration in the FX5-ENET module parameters.
2DA7H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the IP address (IPv6) in
configuration was detected. external device configuration in the FX5-ENET module
parameters.
2DA8H Parameter error A parameter error in external device Reexamine and correct the setting of the existence confirmation in
configuration was detected. external device configuration in the FX5-ENET module
parameters.
2DA9H to Parameter error A parameter error in external device Check the external device configuration settings in the FX5-ENET
2DAAH configuration was detected. module parameters.
2DABH Parameter error A parameter error in external device Check the own node port number setting in external device
configuration was detected. configuration in the FX5-ENET module parameter.
2DB0H Request data error Request and setting data error Check the content of the specified request data.
3030H Hardware error Hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3040H Update error Firmware update file version error For this update, a PLC applicable to the new version is required.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3041H Update error Failure in verification of firmware update file Replace the update file in the SD memory card with the correct
integrity file, and perform update again.
3042H Update error Failure in acquisition of firmware update file Replace the update file in the SD memory card with the correct
file, and perform update again.
3056H Socket communication The socket communication buffer for Read out the received data using the dedicated instruction.
buffer full receiving has no space.
3060H Parameter error The total number of connection is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range.
3061H Parameter error The station number is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3062H Parameter error The number of occupied stations is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range.
3063H Parameter error The reserved station specification is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range.
3064H Parameter error The IP address form is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3065H Parameter error The group number is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 115
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
3066H Parameter error The IP address is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3067H Parameter error The total number of group is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
3068H Parameter error The group number is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
306AH Parameter error The constant link scan setting is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
306BH Parameter error The timeout time to disconnection detection Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
is outside the range.
306CH Parameter error The consecutive number of time outs to Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
disconnection detection is outside the
range.
306DH Parameter error The IP address form is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
306EH Parameter error The IP address (IPv4) is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
306FH Parameter error The subnet mask is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3073H Parameter error The gateway address (IPv4) is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
3074H Parameter error The subnet mask is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3082H Parameter error The timer change is outside the specified Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
3085H Parameter error The destination alive check start interval Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
timer is outside the range.
3086H Parameter error The start interval timer unit is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
specified range.
3087H Parameter error The destination alive check interval timer is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
3088H Parameter error The interval timer unit is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
specified range.
3089H Parameter error The destination alive check resend count is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
3094H Parameter error The number of retry is outside the range. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3095H Parameter error The number of target IP address setting is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
3096H Parameter error The start target IP address setting is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range.
3097H Parameter error The complete target IP address setting is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
3098H Parameter error The start target IP address setting is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range > the complete target IP address
setting is outside the range
3099H Parameter error The number of excluded IP address setting Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
is outside the range.
309AH Parameter error The target IP address setting number is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
309BH Parameter error The excluded IP address number is outside Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
the range.
309CH Parameter error The excluded IP address is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
309DH to Parameter error Target module support error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
309EH
309FH Parameter error The gateway address (IPv6) is outside the Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range.
30A8H Parameter error The total number of occupied stations is Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
outside the range.
30A9H Parameter error The master station and remote station IP Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
addresses match
30AAH Parameter error Simple CPU communication parameter out Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
of range
30ABH Parameter error E-mail setting parameter out of range Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
30ACH Parameter error DNS setting parameter out of range Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
116 10.6 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
30ADH Parameter error MQTT connection setting parameter out of Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range
30AEH Parameter error Certificate tool setting parameter out of Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
range
3103H Certificate read failure Flash data read error Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
10
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
3104H Certificate read failure Flash data Error Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
3106H Certificate read failure Trusted certificate data error Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
3107H Certificate read failure The trusted certificate data is incorrect. Recheck the trusted certificate data since it is not appropriate.
Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, use another certificate since the
certificate used is not available.
3108H Certificate read failure The validity period of the trusted certificate Recheck the trusted certificate data since it is not appropriate.
has expired. Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, use another certificate since the
certificate used is not available.
3109H Certificate read failure The trusted certificate data is not supported. Recheck the trusted certificate data since it is not appropriate.
Write the trusted certificate again using Certificate Configuration
Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, use another certificate since the
certificate used is not available.
310BH Certificate read failure The CRL data is incorrect. Recheck the CRL data since it is not appropriate. Write the CRL
again using Certificate Configuration Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
310DH Client certificate read Client certificate data error Write the client certificate again using Certificate Configuration
failure Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
310FH Client certificate read Private key data error Write the client certificate again using Certificate Configuration
failure Tool for FX5-ENET.
If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
3200H Security function error The certificate has expired. Renew the expired client certificate.
(Encryption
communication)
3CF1H Hardware error An error of hardware was detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3E30H to Hardware error An error of hardware was detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3E42H
3E50H to Hardware error An error of hardware was detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3E56H
3E60H to Hardware error An error of hardware was detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3E63H
3F92H Memory error An error was detected in the memory. • Take measures to reduce noise.
• Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 117
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
3FA1H Memory error An error was detected in the memory. • Take measures to reduce noise.
• Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
4030H Device specification error The specified device name cannot be Check the specified device name.
handled.
4031H Device specification error • The specified device No. is out of the • Check the specified device number.
range. • Check the external device allocation.
• The external device does not correspond • Check the specified device name.
to the specified device name.
4032H Device specification error A device name (TS, TC, SS, SC, CS, or CC) • Check the specified device modification method.
that cannot be used for SLMP random • Check the specified device name.
reading/writing (in word units) was specified.
4033H Device specification error The specified device is for the system, and Do not write data into the specified device or turn on or off the
data cannot be written. device.
4041H Intelligent function module The access range exceeds the buffer Check the starting address and the number of access points, and
specification error memory range of the specified intelligent access within the buffer memory range existing in the intelligent
function module. function module.
4043H Intelligent function module The specified intelligent function module Check the module number of the specified intelligent function
specification error does not exist. module.
480CH During execution of The operation cannot be executed because Re-execute after the completion of the automatic detection
automatic detection the automatic detection function is being function.
function executed.
480DH During execution of The operation cannot be executed because Re-execute after the completion of the communication setting
communication setting the communication setting reflection reflection function.
reflection function function is being executed.
480EH During execution of The operation cannot be executed because Re-execute after the completion of the parameter read/write
parameter read/write the parameter read/write function is being function.
function executed.

*1 Cannot be checked in the "Module Diagnostics" window and 'Latest error code' (Un\G29). The error codes are stored only in 'IP address
storage area write error code' (Un\G61).
*2 Cannot be checked in the "Module Diagnostics" window and 'Latest error code' (Un\G29). The error codes are stored only in 'IP address
storage area clear error code' (Un\G62).

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
118 10.6 List of Error Codes
Ethernet communication error
The Ethernet communication error codes can be checked in "Status of Each Connection" on the "Ethernet Diagnostics"
screen of FX5-ENET. ( Page 100 Status of Each Connection) The error codes will be stored in 'Error code' (Un\G108 to
Un\G139).
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action 10
C012H Error during execution of • The port number already used in the open Check and correct the port number of the Ethernet module and
dedicated instruction completion connection of TCP/IP is set. the target device.
• The external device port number set in the
external device information is duplicated.
C013H Error during execution of The port number used in the open completion Check and correct the port number of the Ethernet module.
dedicated instruction connection is set during the open processing
of UDP/IP.
C017H Error during execution of The connection was not established by the • Check the operation of the target device.
dedicated instruction open processing of the TCP connection. • Check the open processing of the target device.
• Correct the open setting of the communication parameter.
• Check the port number of the Ethernet module, the IP address/
port number of the target device, and the open method.
• Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
C020H Error during execution of The data length exceeds the allowable range. • Correct the data length.
dedicated instruction • If the amount of data to send exceeds the prescribed amount,
divide and send the data.
C027H Error during execution of Socket communication send message has • Check the operation of the external device or switching hub.
dedicated instruction failed. • Since there may be congestion of packets on the line, send
data after a certain period of time.
• Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
• Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub.
• Execute the communication status test, and if the test was
completed with an error, take the corrective action.
• Execute the module communication test, and check that there
is no failure in the module.
• Check the IP address specified as the target.
C029H Error during execution of Description of control data is not correct. Correct the descriptions of the control data.
dedicated instruction
C035H Ethernet communication The existence of the external device could not • Check the operation of the external device.
error be confirmed within the response monitor • Reexamine and change the set values for existence
timer value. confirmation.
• Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
C04CH Ethernet communication The data cannot be sent since the internal Send the same data again, and check the receiving of the
error buffer such as IP header buffer has no space. response.
C050H Ethernet communication When the communication data code is set to • For communication, set to "Binary" in the communication data
error "ASCII", ASCII code data which cannot be code and restart the CPU module.
converted to binary is received. • Correct the send data from the target device and send it.
C051H Ethernet communication Maximum number of bit devices for which data Correct the number of bit devices that can be read or written all at
error can be read/written all at once is outside the once, and send to Ethernet module again.
allowable range.
C052H Ethernet communication Maximum number of word devices for which Correct the number of word devices that can read or write all at
error data can be read/written all at once is outside once, and send data to Ethernet module again.
the allowable range.
C053H Ethernet communication Maximum number of bit devices for which data Correct the number of bit devices that can be read or written all at
error can be random read/written all at once is random, and send data to Ethernet module again.
outside the allowable range.
C054H Ethernet communication Maximum number of word devices for which Correct the number of word devices that can read or write all at
error data can be random read/written all at once is random, and send data to Ethernet module again.
outside the allowable range.
C056H Ethernet communication Read or write request exceeds maximum Correct starting address or the number of read and write points,
error address. and send data to Ethernet module again. (Be careful not to
exceed the maximum address.)
C057H Ethernet communication The request data length in the SLMP message After reexamining and correcting the content of the text or the
error does not match the number of data in the request data length in the header, resend the message to the
character section (part of the text). Ethernet module.
C058H Ethernet communication Request data length after ASCII-to-binary After reexamining and correcting the content of the text or the
error conversion does not match the number of data request data length in the header, resend the message to the
in the character section (part of text). Ethernet module.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 119
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
C059H Ethernet communication • Error in command or subcommand • Reconsider request contents.
error specification. • Send command or subcommand that can be used by the
• There is a command or subcommand that Ethernet module.
cannot be used by the Ethernet module.
C05BH Ethernet communication Ethernet module cannot read or write from/to Reconsider device to read or write.
error specified device.
C05CH Ethernet communication Error in request contents. (Reading or writing Correct request content, and send data to Ethernet module again.
error by bit unit for word device, etc.) (Subcommand correction, etc.)
C05EH Ethernet communication The communication time between the • Increase the monitor timer setting.
error Ethernet module and PLC CPU exceeds the • Check the connection between the CPU and Ethernet module.
Ethernet monitor timer setting.
C05FH Ethernet communication There is a request that cannot be executed for • Correct network number, request station number, request
error the target CPU module. destination module I/O number, or request destination module
station number.
• Correct contents of write request and/or read request.
C060H Ethernet communication Error in request contents. (Error in Correct request content, and send data to Ethernet module again.
error specification of data for bit device, etc.) (Data correction, etc.)
C061H Ethernet communication Request data length does not match the After reexamining and correcting the content of the text or the
error number of data in the character section (part request data length in the header, resend the message to the
of text). Ethernet module.
C06FH Ethernet communication When the communication data code is set to • Sent a request message which is adapted to the setting of the
error "Binary", a request message of ASCII is communication data code.
received. (Error history of this error code is • Change to the communication data code which is adapted to
registered but no error response returns.) the request message.
C0D8H Ethernet communication The number of the specified blocks exceeds Correct the specified value of for the number of blocks.
error the range.
C0DEH Ethernet communication Socket communication receive message fails. • Check the operation of the external device or switching hub.
error • Since there may be congestion of packets on the line, send
data after a certain period of time.
• Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
• Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub.
• Execute the communication status test, and if the test was
completed with an error, take the corrective action.
• Execute the module communication test, and check that there
is no failure in the module.
C101H Ethernet communication No response can be received from the DNS • Check the DNS server address.
error server. • Run a PING command to check whether the DNS server can be
communicated.
• Check that the own station IP address and the DNS server IP
address are in the same class. (If the class differs, check the
router settings.)
C11CH E-mail function No e-mail address is found. • Check if the e-mail settings in the parameter settings are
correct.
• If the e-mail server and the Ethernet module are connected via
a router, check whether the router settings are correct.
• Send a test e-mail to an address that is ensured to receive the
e-mail. If the e-mail is received successfully, check again that
the domain name after "@" is correct.
C120H E-mail function The SMTP server could not be open. • Check that the SMTP server port number is 25.
• Run a PING command to check whether the SMTP server can
be communicated.
• If TLS connection is specified, check if the certificate is
appropriate.
• Check if there is a problem with environments such as network
cables.
C124H E-mail function The response from the SMTP server is timed • Check that there is no error with the SMTP server.
out. • Check for any excessive network load.
C126H E-mail function The SMTP server could not be closed. • Check that there is no error with the SMTP server.
• Check for any excessive network load.
C131H E-mail function The SMTP server was running, but an error • Check whether the specified user name is registered with the
response was received. server.
• Send the e-mail again after a certain period of time.
C13DH E-mail function SMTP server authentication error • Check that the SMTP login ID and password are correct.
• Check the SMTP server status.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
120 10.6 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
C13EH E-mail function SMTP server authentication unsupported error • Check whether the SMTP server supports authentication.
• Change the SMTP authentication method to "No
authentication" or "POP before SMTP".
C180H E-mail function • Concurrent mail send/receive instructions • Check the mail send/receive status before issuing a mail send/
• A mail send instruction was issued while a receive instruction.
mail was being sent. • Check that there is no error in the set connection number.
(The connection number specified in the e-mail server connection
10
device with the external device configuration is specified by
another function.)
C1A4H Ethernet communication • The operator tried to use the Ethernet Execute the Ethernet diagnosis, CC-Link IEF Basic diagnosis or
error diagnosis, CC-Link IEF Basic diagnosis or simple CPU communication diagnosis using the direct connection
simple CPU communication diagnosis to the CPU module (built-in Ethernet port).
connecting directly to the Ethernet port of
the Ethernet module.
• A function not supported for the target
device was executed.
C1A6H Ethernet communication The specification of the connection number is Specify 1 to 32 for the connection number.
error not correct.
C1A7H Ethernet communication The specified network number is incorrect. Correct the specified network number.
error
C1A8H Ethernet communication The specified station number is incorrect. Correct the specified station number.
error
C1ADH Ethernet communication The specified data length is incorrect. Correct the specified data length.
error
C1B0H Ethernet communication The open processing of the specified Perform the open processing after completing the close
error connection has been already completed. processing.
C1B1H Ethernet communication The open processing of the specified Perform the open processing.
error connection is not completed.
C1B2H Ethernet communication The specified connection is executing the Execute after the OPEN/CLOSE instruction is completed.
error OPEN/CLOSE instruction.
C1B3H Ethernet communication The specified channel is being used by • Change the channel number.
error another send/receive instruction. • Execute after the send/receive instruction is completed.
C1D3H Error during execution of An instruction not conforming to the • Check that the dedicated instruction can be executed by the
dedicated instruction specifications of the communication method specified communication method. Correct the program if the
for the connection was executed. instruction cannot be executed.
• Check that there is no error in the connection specification of
the dedicated instruction.
C709H Ethernet communication A communication error occurred in MELSOFT • Do not specify the direct connection when MELSOFT is not
error direct connection. directly connected.
• In the case of direct connection, do not turn off or reset the CPU
module or disconnect the cable during communication.
C801H Security function error Certificate creation has failed. Execute the client certificate creation again after a while.
(Encryption If retries fail with the same error, a possible cause is a hardware
communication) failure of the target module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
CB00H MQTT communication Connection has been already established with Although FB: MQTT_Connect is set to Connect, Connect is
error the server. instructed again without the Disconnect instruction. Instruct
Disconnect before Connect.
CB01H MQTT communication An error has occurred while connection to the Check the following points and retry the processing from FB:
error server is in progress. MQTT_Connect.
• Is there any problem with network cables or other
environmental factors?
• Are the IP address and host name correct?
• Is the server port number correct?
• Is the server operating normally?
CB02H MQTT communication Socket generation has failed. • Retry the operation after a while.
error • Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 121
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
CB03H MQTT communication Host name resolution has failed. • Check the DNS server address.
error • Run a PING command to check whether the DNS server can be
communicated.
• Check that the own station IP address and the DNS server IP
address are in the same class. (If the class differs, check the
router settings.)
CB04H MQTT communication An SSL connection error has occurred. • Retry the operation after a while.
error • Check the network environment.
• Check the host name of the server to be connected.
• Check the connection settings of the external device. (Such as
TLS/TCP or port address)
• If TLS is specified, check if the certificate is appropriate. (Check
for problems such as an appropriate certificate not being set
and the common name in the server certificate not matching
with the settings of the destination host.)
CB07H MQTT communication An SNI extended setting error has occurred. • Retry the operation after a while.
error • Reset the CPU module, and then switch it to RUN mode. If the
error occurs again even after the above action is taken, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
CB10H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (CONNACK is not Check the following points and retry the processing from FB:
error received) has occurred. MQTT_Connect.
• Is there any problem with network cables or other
environmental factors?
• Is the server operating normally?
CB11H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (MQTT protocol Check that the MQTTVersion of the server is 3.1.1.
error version invalid) has occurred.
CB12H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (identifier invalid) Check that the string used is permitted for the server.
error has occurred.
CB13H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (the server cannot Check whether the server can use MQTT.
error be used) has occurred.
CB14H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (invalid user name Check that the user name and password are valid.
error or password) has occurred.
CB15H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (connection is Check that connection of the client concerned is permitted by the
error prohibited) has occurred. server.
CB16H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (a code not Check if there is a problem with the server.
error specified in the MQTT protocol has been
received) has occurred.
CB17H MQTT communication An MQTT connection error (network error Check if the QoS specification is correct when specifying the Will
error during connection) has occurred. status. (This error occurs if the server does not support the
specified QoS.) If there is no problem with the specification, check
the network environment, such as the connection cable.
CB20H MQTT communication A subscribe execution error (SUBACK is not Retry the operation from FB: MQTT_Subscribe or FB:
error received) has occurred. MQTT_Connect. If the error persists, check if there is a problem
with the server.
CB21H MQTT communication A subscribe execution error (SUBACK is Check if there is a problem with the server.
error received, but the server returns an error) has
occurred.
CB22H MQTT communication The subscribe ID overlaps. A subscribe ID that is already set is specified again with another
error topic.
Change the subscribe ID.
CB23H MQTT communication The topic overlaps. A topic that is already set is specified again with another
error subscribe ID.
Change it without performing the other subscribe process.
CB24H MQTT communication The number of registrations for subscribe ID0 The maximum number (256) that can be specified for the
error has exceeded the maximum value. subscribe ID0 has been exceeded.
Keep the number of subscriptions with subscribe ID0 to 256 or
less.
CB25H MQTT communication A network error during execution of This error also occurs if the specified topic filter is invalid or the
error SUBSCRIBE command has occurred. server does not support the specified QoS. Check that there is no
error with the specification of the topic filter/QoS.
If there is no problem with the specification, check the network
environment, such as the connection cable.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
122 10.6 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
CB30H MQTT communication An unsubscribe execution error (UNSUBACK This error also occurs when an invalid string is specified in the
error is not received) has occurred. topic filter. Check if there is a problem with the topic filter. If there
is no problem with the topic filter, check if there is a problem with
the server.
CB32H MQTT communication A network error during execution of This error may occur also when an invalid string is specified in the
error UNSUBSCRIBE command has occurred. topic filter. Check if there is a problem with the topic filter. If there
is no problem, check the network environment, such as the
10
connection cable, then try again.
CB40H MQTT communication A publish execution error (the PUBLISH Check if there is a problem with the server.
error sequence cannot be completed) has occurred.
CB41H MQTT communication A network error during execution of PUBLISH This error also occurs if an invalid string is specified in the topic or
error command has occurred. the server does not support the specified QoS. Check that there is
no error with the specification of the topic/QoS.
If there is no problem with the specification, check the network
environment, such as the connection cable.
CB50H MQTT communication No server is connected. Retry the operation from Connect with FB: MQTT_Connect.
error
CB51H MQTT communication The topic is not specified. Specify the topic name.
error
CB52H MQTT communication There is no NULL code (00H) at the end of the Set the NULL code (00H) at the end of the string without the size
error string. specification.
CB53H MQTT communication A UTF-8 conversion data error has occurred. Check the specified Unicode string.
error
CB54H MQTT communication Incorrect data size specification has occurred. The size specification of the topic or message has exceeded the
error maximum value.
CB55H MQTT communication A GP.SOCRCV error has occurred. Check if function blocks are executed at the same time.
error
CB56H MQTT communication MQTT connection is performed while the Perform MQTT connection after writing the certificate.
error certificate is being written.
CB57H MQTT communication A network error is detected during receiving Check the network environment, such as the connection cable,
error processing. and execute again.
CB60H MQTT communication The connection number has been set Check that there is no error in the set connection number.
error incorrectly. (The connection number specified in the MQTT connection device
with the external device configuration is specified by another
function.)
CB64H MQTT communication A GP.SOCSND error has occurred. Check if function blocks are executed at the same time.
error
CB66H MQTT communication A GP.SOCSND error has occurred. Check if function blocks are executed at the same time.
error
CB69H MQTT communication An error has occurred in converting the An error occurs when converting receive data from UTF-8 to
error Unicode string. Unicode. Check for errors in the source data.
CB6AH MQTT communication Receive data was discarded since the The number of characters exceeded 16383 in converting the
error maximum receive size exceeded in converting receive data from UTF-8 to Unicode. Check for errors in the
the Unicode string. source data.
CB70H MQTT communication The received message was discarded for The size of the receive data does not fit the specification even
error being too large. after Unicode conversion.
(Greater than topic: 765 bytes, message: 49149 bytes (utf-8 3
bytes is equivalent to one Unicode character))
Check for errors in the source data.
CB7FH MQTT communication There is no ping response from the server. If communications other than ping also fail, check the server and
error start over from FB: MQTT_Connect.
CF70H Communication path An error occurred in the Ethernet • Check the operation of the target device.
error communication path. • Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
CF71H Timeout error A timeout error occurred. • Check the cautions for the executed function.
• Check the operation of the target device.
• Since there may be congestion of packets on the line, send
data after a certain period of time.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6 List of Error Codes 123
 Error code Error name Error details and causes Action
CFB0H Simple CPU Transmission fails due to retransmission • Check the operation of the external device.
communication error timeout. • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
• Reconsider the communication start wait time.
• Reconsider and correct the IP address and Ethernet address of
the external device.
• Confirm that the external devices have the ARP function, and
communicate with an external device that has the ARP
function.
• When the communication destination is a MODBUS/TCP
connection device and the communication pattern is Write, do
not specify Input or Input Register for the transfer destination
device.
CFB1H Simple CPU The external device cannot be connected or is • Check if the connection cable is disconnected.
communication error disconnected. • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
CFB2H Simple CPU The specified own station port number is Reconsider the port number, and prevent duplication.
communication error duplicated.
CFB3H Simple CPU A request to the CPU module fails. • Reconsider the monitor time of the CPU response monitor
communication error timer.
• Reconsider the device/label access service processing setting.
CFB4H Simple CPU An abnormal response was received from the Check the abnormal response code in the buffer memory.
communication error external device.
CFB5H Simple CPU The frame received from the external device is • Check the operation of the external device.
communication error abnormal. • Check the conditions of the cables, hubs, and routers on the
lines to the external devices.
CFBFH Simple CPU Simple CPU communication cannot be • Take measures against noise.
communication error performed. • If the same error is displayed after retry, please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
124 10.6 List of Error Codes
10.7 List of Event Code
The following table lists events that occur in the FX5-ENET.
Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed
information 1
Detailed
information 2
Detailed
information 3
10
0800 System Error Minor Link-down Operation Communication 
source speed and
information communication
mode
0904 System Error Minor Socket communication sending failure Operation  
source
information
1080 System Error Major ROM write count error Number of times  
information*1
1081 System Error Major Number of built-in data flash writes exceeded Number of times  
information*1
1810 System Error Minor IP address change failure   
1811 System Error Minor FTP response transmission timeout (EIP   
parameter transfer or server certificate write)
1812 System Error Minor FTP response transmission timeout (EIP   
parameter transfer or server certificate write)
1813 System Error Minor E-mail setting change failure   
1814 System Error Minor DNS setting change failure   
1815 System Error Minor E-mail sending failure or E-mail setting change   
failure
1816 System Error Minor E-mail setting change setting value out of range Parameter  
information*2
1817 System Error Minor DNS setting change setting value out of range   
1818 System Error Minor E-mail setting change setting value out of range   
(TLS setting)
1819 System Error Minor Certificate tool setting change failure   
181A System Error Minor Certificate tool setting change setting value out Parameter  
of range information*2
181B System Error Minor MQTT connection setting change failure   
181C System Error Minor MQTT connection setting change setting value Parameter  
out of range information*2
181D System Error Minor MQTT connection setting change setting value   
out of range (TLS setting)
181E System Error Minor MQTT connection setting change setting value   
out of range (client port number setting)
1852 System Error Minor Out-of-range setting error Buffer memory  Failure
information information
1900 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (IP address change   
function sector)
1901 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (Total number sector   
of writes to memory Flash ROM)
1902 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (Flash memory test   
sector)
1903 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (TCP inactivity   
timeout sector)
1904 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (EIP parameter   
sector)
1905 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (Tool setting change   
function sector)
1906 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (Trusted certificate   
parameter sector)
1907 System Error Minor Built-in data flash memory check error   
(Module's certificate parameter sector)

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.7 List of Event Code 125
 Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2 information 3
1910 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (E-mail setting   
change function sector)
1911 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (DNS setting change   
function sector)
1912 System Error Minor Flash memory check error (MQTT setting   
change function sector)
1E10 System Error Minor EtherNet/IP communication error   
1E11 System Error Minor EtherNet/IP communication error   
1E12 System Error Minor EtherNet/IP communication error   
1E13 System Error Minor EtherNet/IP communication error   
1E14 System Error Minor EtherNet/IP communication error   
1F00 System Error Minor MELSOFT connection error   
2160 System Error Moderate IP address duplication detection   Failure
information
2C80 System Error Moderate Receive parameter sum value error   Failure
information
2C81 System Error Moderate Receive parameter data error   Failure
information
2C82 System Error Moderate Divided parameter receive error   Failure
information
2CF0 System Error Moderate FX5-ENET WDT error occurs.   Failure
information
2DA0 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Error in the Parameter  Failure
number of connection setting) information*2 information
2DA1 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Connection Parameter  Failure
number error) information*2 information
2DA2 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Communication Parameter  Failure
destination communication method error) information*2 information
2DA3 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Protocol system Parameter  Failure
error) information*2 information
2DA4 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Open system Parameter  Failure
error) information*2 information
2DA5 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Fixed buffer Parameter  Failure
transmitting method error) information*2 information
2DA6 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (IP address Parameter  Failure
(IPv4) error) information*2 information
2DA7 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (IP address Parameter  Failure
(IPv6) error) information*2 information
2DA8 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Existence Parameter  Failure
confirmation specification error) information*2 information
2DA9 System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Communication Parameter  Failure
data code error) information*2 information
2DAA System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter (Error in Parameter  Failure
specification of writing during running) information*2 information
2DAB System Error Moderate Connection setting parameter own node port Parameter  
number error information
2DB0 System Error Moderate Request data error   Failure
information
3030 System Error Moderate Specific code error   
3056 System Error Moderate Socket communication buffer full   Failure
information
3060 System Error Moderate The total number of connection is outside the Parameter  
range. (Configuration setting parameter) information*2
3061 System Error Moderate The station number is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration setting parameter) information*2
3062 System Error Moderate The number of occupied stations is outside the Parameter  
range. (Configuration setting parameter) information*2

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
126 10.7 List of Event Code
Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2 information 3
3063 System Error Moderate The reserved station specification is outside the Parameter  
range. (Configuration setting parameter) information*2
3064 System Error Moderate The IP address form is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration setting parameter) information*2 10
3065 System Error Moderate The group number is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration setting parameter) information*2
3066 System Error Moderate The IP address is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration setting parameter) information*2
3067 System Error Moderate The total number of group is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration parameter according to group) information*2
3068 System Error Moderate The group number is outside the range. Parameter  
(Configuration parameter according to group) information*2
306A System Error Moderate The constant link scan setting is outside the Parameter  
range. (Configuration parameter according to information*2
group)
306B System Error Moderate The timeout time to disconnection detection is Parameter  
outside the range. (Configuration parameter information*2
according to group)
306C System Error Moderate The consecutive number of timeouts to Parameter  
disconnection detection is outside the range. information*2
(Configuration parameter according to group)
306D System Error Moderate The IP address form is outside the range. (IP Parameter  
address setting parameter) information*2
306E System Error Moderate The IP address (IPv4) is outside the range. (IP Parameter  
address setting parameter) information*2
306F System Error Moderate The subnet mask is outside the range. (IP Parameter  
address setting parameter) information*2
3073 System Error Moderate The gateway address (IPv4) is outside the Parameter  
range. (Gateway address setting parameter) information*2
3074 System Error Moderate The subnet mask is outside the range. Parameter  
(Gateway address setting parameter) information*2
3082 System Error Moderate The timer change is outside the specified range. Parameter  
(Data communication timer setting parameter) information*2
3085 System Error Moderate The destination alive check start interval timer is Parameter  
outside the range. (Data communication timer information*2
setting parameter)
3086 System Error Moderate The start interval timer unit is outside the Parameter  
specified range. (Data communication timer information*2
setting parameter)
3087 System Error Moderate The destination alive check interval timer is Parameter  
outside the range. (Data communication timer information*2
setting parameter)
3088 System Error Moderate The interval timer unit is outside the specified Parameter  
range. (Data communication timer setting information*2
parameter)
3089 System Error Moderate The destination alive check resend count is Parameter  
outside the range. (Data communication timer information*2
setting parameter)
3094 System Error Moderate The number of retries is outside the range. Parameter  
(Data communication timer setting parameter) information*2
3095 System Error Moderate The number of target IP address setting is Parameter  
outside the range. (IP filter settings) information*2
3096 System Error Moderate IP address 1 is outside the range. (IP filter Parameter  
settings) information*2
3097 System Error Moderate IP address 2 is outside the range. (IP filter Parameter  
settings) information*2
3098 System Error Moderate IP address 1  IP address 2 error (IP filter Parameter  
settings) information*2
3099 System Error Moderate The number of excluded IP address setting is Parameter  
outside the range. (IP filter settings) information*2

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.7 List of Event Code 127
 Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2 information 3
309A System Error Moderate The target IP address setting number is outside Parameter  
the range. (IP filter settings) information*2
309B System Error Moderate The excluded IP address number is outside the Parameter  
range. (IP filter settings) information*2
309C System Error Moderate The excluded IP address is outside the range. Parameter  
(IP filter settings) information*2
309D System Error Moderate Target module support error (IP address Parameter  
settings parameter) information*2
309E System Error Moderate Target module support error (Gateway address Parameter  
setting parameter) information*2
30A8 System Error Moderate The total number of occupied stations is outside Parameter  
the range. (Configuration setting parameter) information*2
30A9 System Error Moderate The master station and remote station IP Parameter  
addresses match (Configuration setting information*2
parameter)
30AA System Error Moderate Simple CPU communication parameter out of Parameter  
range information*2
30AB System Error Moderate E-mail setting parameter out of range Parameter  
information*2
30AC System Error Moderate DNS setting parameter out of range Parameter  
information*2
30AD System Error Moderate MQTT connection configuration parameter Parameter  
information is incorrect. information*2
30AE System Error Moderate Certificate tool setting parameter information is Parameter  
incorrect. information*2
3103 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
3104 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
3106 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
3107 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
3108 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
3109 System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
310B System Error Moderate Certificate read failure   
310D System Error Moderate Client certificate read failure   
310F System Error Moderate Client certificate read failure   
3200 System Error Moderate Security function error (Encryption   
communication)
3CF1 System Error Major BINT disconnection detection timeout error   Failure
information
3E30 System Error Major The fixed memory block acquisition/release ID   Failure
number is invalid. information
3E31 System Error Major Fixed memory block acquisition/release context   Failure
error information
3E32 System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting for   Failure
variable memory block acquisition/release information
3E33 System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting due to   Failure
reset of fixed memory block acquisition/release information
object
3E34 System Error Major Fixed memory block acquisition/release   Failure
parameter error information
3E35 System Error Major The variable memory block acquisition/release   Failure
ID number is invalid. information
3E36 System Error Major Variable memory block acquisition/release   Failure
context error information
3E37 System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting for   Failure
variable memory block acquisition/release information
3E38 System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting due to   Failure
reset of variable memory block acquisition/ information
release object

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
128 10.7 List of Event Code
Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2 information 3
3E39 System Error Major Variable memory block acquisition/release   Failure
parameter error information
3E3A System Error Major E-mail box transmitting/receiving parameter   Failure
error information 10
3E3B System Error Major The e-mail box transmitting/receiving ID number   Failure
is invalid information
3E3C System Error Major E-mail box transmitting/receiving context error   Failure
information
3E3D System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting for e-mail   Failure
box transmitting/receiving information
3E3E System Error Major Semaphore acquisition/release parameter error   Failure
information
3E3F System Error Major Invalid semaphore acquisition/release ID   Failure
number information
3E40 System Error Major Semaphore acquisition/release context error   Failure
information
3E41 System Error Major Semaphore acquisition/release queueing   Failure
overflow information
3E42 System Error Major Error in forced cancellation of waiting for   Failure
semaphore acquisition/release information
3E50 System Error Major RAM check error   
3E51 System Error Major Sum check code error   
3E52 System Error Major Flash memory test access error   
3E53 System Error Major Flash memory test verification error   
3E54 System Error Major Buffer memory access error   
3E55 System Error Major BusAsic register read error   
3E56 System Error Major Factory test mode error   
3E60 to System Error Major MPU error   Failure
3E63 information
3F92 System Error Major Memory error   Failure
information
3FA1 System Error Major Memory error   Failure
information
C050 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C051 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C052 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C053 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C054 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C056 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C057 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C058 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C059 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C05B System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C05C System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C05E System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.7 List of Event Code 129
 Event Event Event Event Detected event Detailed information
code type category status Detailed Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2 information 3
C05F System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C060 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C061 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C06F System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information
C0D8 System Error Minor Ethernet communication error Parameter  
information

*1 <Number of times information>

 Number of times (set value)
*2 <Parameter information>
 Parameter storage location
 Parameter type
 (I/O number)
 (Parameter number)
 Parameter item number

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
130 10.7 List of Event Code
MEMO

10

10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10.7 List of Event Code 131
 APPENDIX
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
This chapter describes the external dimensions of the FX5-ENET.
2-4.5 Mounting holes

80 (Mounting hole pitch)

90

8
20
83
40

(Unit: mm)

APPX
132 Appendix 1 External Dimensions
Appendix 2 Standards
Certification of UL, cUL standards
The FX5-ENET supports UL (UL, cUL) standards.
UL, cUL file number: E95239
For models that support UL standards, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Compliance with EU Directive (CE marking)

This note does not guarantee that an entire machine produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with
the following standards.
Compliance to EMC Directive and LVD Directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user/
manufacturer. For more details, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Requirement for compliance with EMC Directive

The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and design analysis
(through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility (2014/30/
EU) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation.

Attention
This product is designed for use in industrial applications.

Product compatibility
Type: Programmable controller (open type equipment)
Models: FX5 manufactured
from October 1st, 2018 FX5-ENET
A
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directive Remarks
EN61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
- Equipment requirements and tests EMI
• Radiated emission
• Conducted emission
EMS
• Radiated electromagnetic field
• Fast transient burst
• Electrostatic discharge
• High-energy surge
• Voltage drops and interruptions
• Conducted RF
• Power frequency magnetic field

APPX
Appendix 2 Standards 133
 Caution for compliance with EU Directive

Caution for when the FX5-ENET is used

When using the FX5-ENET, attach a ferrite core to the power supply of the CPU module. When attaching the ferrite core,
make 2 turns within approximately 200 mm from the power cable terminal block and connectors. (Ferrite core used in tests by
Mitsubishi: E04SR401938 manufactured by SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG. CO., LTD.)

Caution for when the Ethernet port is used

Use a shielded twisted pair cable for the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable.
Ensure that some part of the outer sheath is removed so as to expose the shield section as shown below and ground both
ends of the shielded twisted pair cable as large area as possible.
Shield

Clamp metal fitting

Compliance with UKCA marking

The requirements for compliance with UKCA marking are the same as that with EU directive (CE marking).

APPX
134 Appendix 2 Standards
Appendix 3 Module Label
The buffer memory of the FX5-ENET can be set using module label.

Structure of the module label

The module label name is defined with the following structure.
• "instance name"_"data format""data type"_"label name"_D
• "instance name"_"data format""module number""data type"_"label name"_D

■Instance name
The following is the instance name of the FX5-ENET.
Model Instance name
FX5-ENET FX5ENET

Ex.
FX5ENET_uValid_Invalid_Flag_Diag_D

■Data format
The data format indicates the size of a buffer memory area. The following shows the classification.
Data format Description
b Bit
bn Bit of multiple buffer memories
u Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit]
ud Double word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]
un Word of multiple buffer memories [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit]

■Data type
The data type indicates the type of a buffer memory area. The following shows the classification.
Data type Description A
Val Display the value of module.
Set Set the module control instruction.
Sts Display the module status.

■Label name
A label name unique to the module.

■_D
This symbol indicates that the module label is for direct access. Value update timing is shown below.
Type Description Access timing
Direct access The values read/written from/to the module labels are reflected to At writing to or reading from the module label
the module immediately.

APPX
Appendix 3 Module Label 135
 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
The buffer memory is used to exchange data between the FX5-ENET and the CPU module or external devices.
Buffer memory values are set to their defaults (initial values) when the system is powered off or the CPU module is reset.

List of buffer memory addresses

Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
29 1DH Latest error code 0 Read
30 1EH Module information 69A0H Read
*1
31 1FH Firmware version Read
34 22H Input signals 0 Read, write
36 24H Output signals 0 Read, write
50 to 51 32H to 33H IP address setting 0.0.0.0 Read, write
52 to 53 34H to 35H Subnet mask pattern setting 0.0.0.0 Read, write
54 to 55 36H to 37H Default router IP address setting 0.0.0.0 Read, write
56 38H IP address storage area write request 0 Read, write
57 39H IP address storage area write status 0 Read
58 3AH IP address storage area clear request 0 Read, write
59 3BH IP address storage area clear status 0 Read
60 3CH IP address change function enable flag 0 Read
61 3DH IP address storage area write error code 0 Read
62 3EH IP address storage area clear error code 0 Read
64 to 65 40H to 41H IP address 192.168.3.251 Read
74 to 75 4AH to 4BH Subnet mask pattern 255.255.255.0 Read
76 to 77 4CH to 4DH Default gateway IP address 0.0.0.0 Read
*2
102 to 104 66H to 68H Ethernet address (MAC address) Read
108 to 139 6CH to 8BH Error code 0 Read
152 to 153 98H to 99H Open completion signal 0 Read
154 to 155 9AH to 9BH Open request signal 0 Read
156 to 157 9CH to 9DH Socket communications receive status signal 0 Read
158 9EH Initial status 0 Read
159 9FH Initial error code 0 Read
201 C9H Same IP address state storage area 0.0.0.0 Read
202 to 204 CAH to CCH MAC address of the already connected station 0.0.0.0 Read
205 to 207 CDH to CFH MAC address of the station connected later 0.0.0.0 Read
300, 301 12CH, 12DH "Communication start at request" request 0 Read, write
304, 305 130H, 131H Periodic communication stop request 0 Read, write
308, 309 134H, 135H Periodic communication restart request 0 Read, write
312, 313 138H, 139H Execution Status flag 0 Read
316, 317 13CH, 13DH Ready 0 Read
320 to 351 140H to 15FH System area  
352 to 383 160H to 17FH Simple CPU communication status 0 Read
416 to 447 1A0H to 1BFH Simple CPU error code 0 Read
480 to 511 1E0H to 1FFH Abnormal response code 0 Read
544 to 575 220H to 23FH Execution interval (current value) 0 Read
1000 to 1127 3E8H to 467H Remote input (RX) 0 Read
1256 to 1383 4E8H to 567H Remote output (RY) 0 Read, write
2000 to 3023 7D0H to BCFH Remote register (RWr) 0 Read
3024 to 4047 BD0H to FCFH Remote register (RWw) 0 Read, write
4100 to 4101 1004H to 1005H Cyclic transmission status of each station 0 Read
4104 to 4105 1008H to 1009H Data link status of each station 0 Read
4112 1010H Total number of connected stations 0 Read

APPX
136 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
4113 to 4114 1011H to 1012H Reserved station specification status of each station 0 Read
4117 1015H Link scan information (group Maximum link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
number 1)
4118 1016H Minimum link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
4119 1017H Current link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
4121 1019H Link scan information (group Maximum link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
number 2)
4122 101AH Minimum link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
4123 101BH Current link scan time (Unit: ms) 0 Read
4127 101FH Diagnostic request information 0 Read, write
4128 1020H Diagnostic information status flag 0 Read
4129 to 4143 1021H to 102FH Diagnostic information 1 0 Read
4144 to 4159 1030H to 103FH Diagnostic information 2 0 Read
4160 1040H CCIEF Basic each status 0 Read
4162 1042H Diagnostic information display request 0 Read, write
4163 1043H Diagnostic information display request execution status 0 Read
4173 0104DH E-mail send function TLS setting 0 Read, write
4174 to 4205 0104EH to 0106DH Sender e-mail address 0 Read, write
4206 to 4269 0106EH to 010ADH Sender name 0 Read, write
4270 010AEH SMTP server specification method 0 Read, write
4271 to 4302 010AFH to 010CEH SMTP server name / IP address 0 Read, write
4303 010CFH SMTP port number 25 Read, write
4304 010D0H Authentication method 0 Read, write
4305 to 4336 010D1H to 010F0H User name 0 Read, write
4337 to 4368 010F1H to 01110H Password 0 Read, write
4369 01111H Certificate verification setting 0 Read, write
4370 01112H E-mail setting change function E-mail setting storage area write request 0 Read, write
4371 01113H E-mail setting storage area write status 0 Read
A
4372 01114H E-mail setting storage area clear request 0 Read, write
4373 01115H E-mail setting storage area clear status 0 Read
4374 01116H E-mail setting change function enable 0 Read
flag
4375 01117H E-mail setting storage area write error 0 Read
code
4376 01118H E-mail setting storage area clear error 0 Read
code
4377 01119H E-mail send function (for Error code 0 Read
diagnostics)
4378 0111AH E-mail sending result 0 Read
4379 0111BH E-mail sending result (direct 0 Read
specification)
4380 0111CH Communication status 0 Read
4381 0111DH Number of cases in which the function 0 Read
block was completed successfully
4382 0111EH Number of cases in which the function 0 Read
block was completed with an error
4383 0111FH Number of mails completed successfully 0 Read
4384 01120H Number of cases in which an attachment 0 Read
was sent
4385 01121H Number of cases in which an e-mail was 0 Read
sent to the server
4386 01122H Number of e-mails completed with an 0 Read
error
4390 to 4391 01126H to 01127H DNS setting DNS server address 1 0 Read, write
4392 to 4393 01128H to 01129H DNS server address 2 0 Read, write
4394 to 4395 0112AH to 0112BH DNS server address 3 0 Read, write
4396 to 4397 0112CH to 0112DH DNS server address 4 0 Read, write

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 137
 Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
4398 0112EH DNS setting change function DNS setting storage area write request 0 Read, write
4399 0112FH DNS setting storage area write status 0 Read
4400 01130H DNS setting storage area clear request 0 Read, write
4401 01131H DNS setting storage area clear status 0 Read
4402 01132H DNS setting change function enable flag 0 Read
4403 01133H DNS setting storage area write error 0 Read
code
4404 01134H DNS setting storage area clear error 0 Read
code
6400 to 8447 1900H to 20FFH Area for simple CPU communication  Read, write
8500 2134H BACnet communication device SystemStatus 0 Read, write
8501 2135H Module status 0 Read
8502 to 8508 2136H to 213CH Time setting reception 0 Read
8509 213DH Time setting read flag 0 Read, write
8510 213EH I-Am transmission 0 Read, write
8520, 8521 2148H, 2149H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
Accumulator 1
8522, 8523 214AH, 214BH PresentValue 0 Read, write
8524 214CH OutOfService 0 Read, write
8525 214DH Reliability 0 Read, write
8526, 8527 214EH, 214FH Scale 0 Read
8528, 8529 2150H, 2151H MaxPresValue 0 Read
8530 2152H Pulse set value 0 Read, write
8531 2153H Units 0 Read
8540 to 8551 215CH to 2167H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
Accumulator 2 communication Accumulator 1
8560 to 8571 2170H to 217BH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
Accumulator 3 communication Accumulator 1
8580 to 8591 2184H to 218FH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
Accumulator 4 communication Accumulator 1
8600, 8601 2198H, 2199H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
8602, 8603 219AH, 219BH AnalogInput 1 PresentValue 0 Read, write
8604 219CH OutOfService 0 Read, write
8605 219DH Reliability 0 Read, write
8606 219EH Units 0 Read
8620 to 8626 21ACH to 21B2H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 2 communication AnalogInput 1
8640 to 8646 21C0H to 21C6H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 3 communication AnalogInput 1
8660 to 8666 21D4H to 21DAH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 4 communication AnalogInput 1
8680 to 8686 21E8H to 21EEH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 5 communication AnalogInput 1
8700 to 8706 21FCH to 2202H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 6 communication AnalogInput 1
8720 to 8726 2210H to 2216H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 7 communication AnalogInput 1
8740 to 8746 2224H to 222AH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogInput 8 communication AnalogInput 1

APPX
138 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
8760, 8761 2238H, 2239H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
AnalogOutput 1
8762, 8763 223AH, 223BH PresentValue 0 Read
8764 223CH OutOfService 0 Read, write
8765 223DH Reliability 0 Read, write
8766, 8767 223EH, 223FH Value set value 0 Read, write
8768 2240H Write setting 0 Read, write
8769 2241H Write control 0 Read, write
8770 2242H Update counter 0 Read
8771 2243H Units 0 Read
8780 to 8791 224CH to 2257H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 2 communication AnalogOutput 1
8800 to 8811 2260H to 226BH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 3 communication AnalogOutput 1
8820 to 8831 2274H to 227FH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 4 communication AnalogOutput 1
8840 to 8851 2288H to 2293H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 5 communication AnalogOutput 1
8860 to 8871 229CH to 22A7H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 6 communication AnalogOutput 1
8880 to 8891 22B0H to 22BBH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 7 communication AnalogOutput 1
8900 to 8911 22C4H to 22CFH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogOutput 8 communication AnalogOutput 1
8920, 8921 22D8H, 22D9H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
AnalogValue 1
8922, 8923 22DAH, 22DBH PresentValue 0 Read
8924 22DCH OutOfService 0 Read, write
8925 22DDH Reliability 0 Read, write
8926, 8927 22DEH, 22DFH Value set value 0 Read, write A
8928 22E0H Write setting 0 Read, write
8929 22E1H Write control 0 Read, write
8930 22E2H Update counter 0 Read
8931 22E3H Units 0 Read
8940 to 8951 22ECH to 22F7H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 2 communication AnalogValue 1
8960 to 8971 2300H to 230BH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 3 communication AnalogValue 1
8980 to 8991 2314H to 231FH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 4 communication AnalogValue 1
9000 to 9011 2328H to 2333H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 5 communication AnalogValue 1
9020 to 9031 233CH to 2347H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 6 communication AnalogValue 1
9040 to 9051 2350H to 235BH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 7 communication AnalogValue 1
9060 to 9071 2364H to 236FH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
AnalogValue 8 communication AnalogValue 1
9080, 9081 2378H, 2379H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
BinaryInput 1
9082 237AH PresentValue 0 Read, write
9083 237BH OutOfService 0 Read, write
9084 237CH Reliability 0 Read, write
9100 to 9104 238CH to 2390H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 2 communication BinaryInput 1
9120 to 9124 23A0H to 23A4H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 3 communication BinaryInput 1
9140 to 9144 23B4H to 23B8H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 4 communication BinaryInput 1

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 139
 Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
9160 to 9164 23C8H to 23CCH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 5 communication BinaryInput 1
9180 to 9184 23DCH to 23E0H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 6 communication BinaryInput 1
9200 to 9204 23F0H to 23F4H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 7 communication BinaryInput 1
9220 to 9224 2404H to 2408H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 8 communication BinaryInput 1
9240 to 9244 2418H to 241CH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 9 communication BinaryInput 1
9260 to 9264 242CH to 2430H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 10 communication BinaryInput 1
9280 to 9284 2440H to 2444H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 11 communication BinaryInput 1
9300 to 9304 2454H to 2458H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 12 communication BinaryInput 1
9320 to 9324 2468H to 246CH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 13 communication BinaryInput 1
9340 to 9344 247CH to 2480H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 14 communication BinaryInput 1
9360 to 9364 2490H to 2494H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 15 communication BinaryInput 1
9380 to 9384 24A4H to 24A8H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryInput 16 communication BinaryInput 1
9400, 9401 24B8H, 24B9H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
BinaryOutput 1
9402 24BAH PresentValue 0 Read
9403 24BBH OutOfService 0 Read, write
9404 24BCH Reliability 0 Read, write
9405 24BDH Value set value 0 Read, write
9406 24BEH Write setting 0 Read, write
9407 24BFH Write control 0 Read, write
9408 24C0H Update counter 0 Read
9409 24C1H FeedbackValue 0 Read, write
9420 to 9429 24CCH to 24D5H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 2 communication BinaryOutput1
9440 to 9449 24E0H to 24E9H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 3 communication BinaryOutput1
9460 to 9469 24F4H to 24FDH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 4 communication BinaryOutput1
9480 to 9489 2508H to 2511H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 5 communication BinaryOutput1
9500 to 9509 251CH to 2525H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 6 communication BinaryOutput1
9520 to 9529 2530H to 2539H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 7 communication BinaryOutput1
9540 to 9549 2544H to 254DH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 8 communication BinaryOutput1
9560 to 9569 2558H to 2561H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 9 communication BinaryOutput1
9580 to 9589 256CH to 2575H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 10 communication BinaryOutput1
9600 to 9609 2580H to 2589H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 11 communication BinaryOutput1
9620 to 9629 2594H to 259DH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 12 communication BinaryOutput1
9640 to 9649 25A8H to 25B1H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 13 communication BinaryOutput1

APPX
140 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
9660 to 9669 25BCH to 25C5H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 14 communication BinaryOutput1
9680 to 9689 25D0H to 25D9H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 15 communication BinaryOutput1
9700 to 9709 25E4H to 25EDH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryOutput 16 communication BinaryOutput1
9720, 9721 25F8H, 25F9H BACnet communication Object ID 0 Read
BinaryValue 1
9722 25FAH PresentValue 0 Read
9723 25FBH OutOfService 0 Read, write
9724 25FCH Reliability 0 Read, write
9725 25FDH Value set value 0 Read, write
9726 25FEH Write setting 0 Read, write
9727 25FFH Write control 0 Read, write
9728 2600H Update counter 0 Read
9740 to 9748 260CH to 2614H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 2 communication BinaryValue 1
9760 to 9768 2620H to 2628H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 3 communication BinaryValue 1
9780 to 9788 2634H to 263CH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 4 communication BinaryValue 1
9800 to 9808 2648H to 2650H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 5 communication BinaryValue 1
9820 to 9828 265CH to 2664H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 6 communication BinaryValue 1
9840 to 9848 2670H to 2678H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 7 communication BinaryValue 1
9860 to 9868 2684H to 268CH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 8 communication BinaryValue 1
9880 to 9888 2698H to 26A0H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet   A
BinaryValue 9 communication BinaryValue 1
9900 to 9908 26ACH to 26B4H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 10 communication BinaryValue 1
9920 to 9928 26C0H to 26C8H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 11 communication BinaryValue 1
9940 to 9948 26D4H to 26DCH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 12 communication BinaryValue 1
9960 to 9968 26E8H to 26F0H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 13 communication BinaryValue 1
9980 to 9988 26FCH to 2704H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 14 communication BinaryValue 1
10000 to 10008 2710H to 2718H BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 15 communication BinaryValue 1
10020 to 10028 2724H to 272CH BACnet communication Same configuration as BACnet  
BinaryValue 16 communication BinaryValue 1
10040, 10041 2738H, 2739H BACnet communication Multi- Object ID  Read
state Input 1
10042, 10043 273AH, 273BH PresentValue  Read, write
10044 273CH OutOfService  Read, write
10045 273DH Reliability  Read, write
10046, 10047 273EH, 273FH NumberOfStates  Read
10060 to 10067 274CH to 2753H BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 2 communication Multi-state Input 1
10080 to 10087 2760H to 2767H BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 3 communication Multi-state Input 1
10100 to 10107 2774H to 277BH BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 4 communication Multi-state Input 1
10120 to 10127 2788H to 278FH BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 5 communication Multi-state Input 1

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 141
 Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
10140 to 10147 279CH to 27A3H BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 6 communication Multi-state Input 1
10160 to 10167 27B0H to 27B7H BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 7 communication Multi-state Input 1
10180 to 10187 27C4H to 27CBH BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
state Input 8 communication Multi-state Input 1
10200, 10201 27D8H, 27D9H BACnet communication Multi- Object ID 0 Read
state Output 1
10202, 10203 27DAH, 27DBH PresentValue 0 Read
10204 27DCH OutOfService 0 Read, write
10205 27DDH Reliability 0 Read, write
10206, 10207 27DEH, 27DFH Value set value 0 Read, write
10208 27E0H Write setting 0 Read, write
10209 27E1H Write control 0 Read, write
10210 27E2H Update counter 0 Read
10212, 10213 27E4H, 27E5H FeedbackValue 0 Read, write
10214, 10215 27E6H, 27E7H NumberOfStates 0 Read
10220 to 10230, 27ECH to 27F6H, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10232 to 10235 27F8H to 27FBH state Output 2 communication Multi-state Output 1
10240 to 10250, 2800H to 280AH, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10252 to 10255 280CH to 280FH state Output 3 communication Multi-state Output 1
10260 to 10270, 2814H to 281EH, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10272 to 10275 2820H to 2823H state Output 4 communication Multi-state Output 1
10280 to 10290, 2828H to 2832H, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10292 to 10295 2834H to 2837H state Output 5 communication Multi-state Output 1
10300 to 10310, 283CH to 2846H, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10312 to 10315 2848H to 284BH state Output 6 communication Multi-state Output 1
10320 to 10330, 2850H to 285AH, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10332 to 10335 285CH to 285FH state Output 7 communication Multi-state Output 1
10340 to 10350, 2864H to 286EH, BACnet communication Multi- Same configuration as BACnet  
10352 to 10355 2870H to 2873H state Output 8 communication Multi-state Output 1
108801 1A901H Function to change MQTT MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read, write
connection settings write request
108802 1A902H MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read
write status
108803 1A903H MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read, write
clear request
108804 1A904H MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read
clear status
108805 1A905H MQTT connection setting change 0 Read
function enable flag
108806 1A906H MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read
write error code
108807 1A907H MQTT connection setting storage area 0 Read
clear error code
108808 1A908H MQTT connection setting Connection number 0 Read
108809 1A909H (connection 1) TCP or TLS 0 Read, write
108810 1A90AH MQTT client port number 0 Read, write
108811 1A90BH MQTT server specification method 0 Read, write
108812 to 108813 1A90CH to 1A90DH MQTT server host name storage address 0 Read, write
108814 to 108815 1A90EH to 1A90FH MQTT server IP address 0 Read, write
108816 1A910H MQTT server port number 0 Read, write
108817 to 108818 1A911H to 1A912H Client ID storage address 0 Read, write
108819 to 108820 1A913H to 1A914H User name storage address 0 Read, write
108821 to 108822 1A915H to 1A916H Password storage address 0 Read, write
108823 1A917H Server certificate verification 0 Read, write

APPX
142 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Buffer memory address Name Initial value Read, write
Decimal Hexadecimal
108872 1A948H Tool setting change function Tool setting storage area write request 0 Read, write
108873 1A949H Tool setting storage area write status 0 Read
108874 1A94AH Tool setting storage area clear request 0 Read, write
108875 1A94BH Tool setting storage area clear status 0 Read
108876 1A94CH Tool setting change function enable flag 0 Read
108877 1A94DH Tool setting storage area write error code 0 Read
108878 1A94EH Tool setting storage area clear error code 0 Read
108879 1A94FH Tool setting Certificate Configuration Tool connection 0 Read, write
control setting
108880 to 108895 1A950H to 1A95FH Certificate Configuration Tool password 0 Read, write
108897 1A961H Certificate diagnostic Certificate expiration within 90 days flag 0 Read
108898 1A962H information Expired certificate flag 0 Read
108899 1A963H Certificate function ready-to-enable state 0 Read
108900 1A964H MQTT diagnostic information MQTT function status 0 Read
(overall)
108901 1A965H Session status 0 Read
108902 1A966H Latest error code 0 Read
108903 1A967H MQTT connection diagnostics Connection number 0 Read
108904 1A968H Session status 0 Read
108905 to 108906 1A969H to 1A96AH System area  
108907 1A96BH Will setting 0 Read
108908 to 108909 1A96CH to 1A96DH Connection time (minutes) 0 Read
108910 to 108911 1A96EH to 1A96FH Receive count 0 Read
108912 to 108913 1A970H to 1A971H Total receive size (byte) 0 Read
108914 to 108915 1A972H to 1A973H Transmission count 0 Read
108916 to 108917 1A974H to 1A975H Total transmission size (byte) 0 Read
108918 to 108919 1A976H to 1A977H Number of discarded packets 0 Read
108920 1A978H Latest error code (session) 0 Read
A
108975 1A9AFH MQTT function operation MQTT connection: Communication 0 Read
information status
108976 1A9A0H MQTT connection: Error code 0 Read
108977 1A9A1H MQTT Publish sending: Communication 0 Read
status
108978 1A9A2H MQTT Publish sending: Error code 0 Read
108979 1A9A3H MQTT Subscribe sending: 0 Read
Communication status
108980 1A9B4H MQTT Subscribe sending: Error code 0 Read
108981 1A9B5H MQTT receiving: Communication status 0 Read
108982 1A9B6H MQTT receiving: Error code 0 Read
109007 1A9CFH MQTT connection setting MQTT server host name: Number of  Read, write
(string) characters
109008 to 109106 1A9D0H to 1AA32H MQTT server host name  Read, write
109107 1AA33H Client ID: Number of characters  Read, write
109108 to 109306 1AA34H to 1AAFAH Client ID  Read, write
109307 1AAFBH User name: Number of characters  Read, write
109308 to 109406 1AAFCH to User name  Read, write
1AB5EH
109407 1AB5FH Password: Number of characters  Read, write
109408 to 109506 1AB60H to 1ABC2H Password  Read, write

*1 The firmware version of the FX5-ENET is stored. For Ver. 1.000, 1000 is stored.
*2 MAC address written before shipment

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 143
 Details of buffer memory addresses
The following describes the buffer memory addresses of the FX5-ENET.
For details on the buffer memory (Un\8500 to Un\10355) of the BACnet function, refer to  MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet
Reference Manual.

Latest error code

■Latest error code (Un\G29)
The latest error code that has occurred in FX5-ENET is stored. (0 is stored when communications are normal.)
For details on error code, refer to  Page 111 Module error.

Module information
■Module information (Un\G30)
This area stores the module information (69A0H) of the FX5-ENET.

Firmware version
■Firmware version (Un\G31)
This area stores the firmware version of FX5-ENET.

Ex.
When firmware version of the FX5-ENET is Ver. 1.000: K1000

Input signals
■Input signals (Un\G34)
These signals are used to check the status of FX5-ENET.
Address Bit Signal name Description
Un\G34 b0 Module ready A signal for checking the status of completion of preparation for operation of FX5-ENET.
• On: The module is operable.
• Off: The module is not operable. (In preparation)
b15 Module error status A signal for checking the occurrence of error (minor/moderate/major) of FX5-ENET
• On: An error has occurred (minor/moderate/major).
• Off: No error
When the signal is turned on (an error occurs), remove the cause of the error, and turn on
'Module error clear request' (Un\G36.b15). Then, the signal will be turned off.

Output signals
■Output signals (Un\G36)
These signals are used for controlling the FX5-ENET.
Address Bit Signal name Description
Un\G36 b15 Module error clear request Requests to clear the error that has occurred in FX5-ENET. To request to clear the module
error, turn off, on and off the signal.
Issuing the request after the cause of the error is removed will clear the followings.
• 'Module error status' (Un\G34.b15) is turned on and off.
• The ERROR LED is turned off.
• The following buffer memory
- 'Latest error code' (Un\G29)
- 'IP address storage area write error code' (Un\G61)
- 'IP address storage area clear error code' (Un\G62)
- 'Error code' (Un\G108 to Un\G139)
- 'Same IP address state storage area' (Un\G201)
- 'MAC address of the already connected station' (Un\G202 to Un\G204)
- 'MAC address of the station connected later' (Un\G205 to Un\G207)

APPX
144 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
IP address setting
■IP address setting (Un\G50 to Un\G51)
Stores IP address to be set when using IP address change function.
Stores 0 when writing to IP address storage area is completed normally.
Address Description
Un\G50 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G51 1st octet, 2nd octet

Ex.
When IP address is 192.168.3.250: Un\G50 = H03FA, Un\G51 = HC0A8

Subnet mask pattern setting

■Subnet mask pattern setting (Un\G52 to Un\G53)
Stores subnet mask pattern to be set when using IP address change function.
Stores 0 when writing to IP address storage area is completed normally.
Address Description
Un\G52 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G53 1st octet, 2nd octet

Ex.
When subnet mask pattern is 255.255.255.0: Un\G52 = HFF00, Un\G53 = HFFFF

Default router IP address setting

■Default router IP address setting (Un\G54 to Un\G55)
Stores default router IP address to be set when using IP address change function.
Stores 0 when writing to IP address storage area is completed normally. A
Address Description
Un\G54 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G55 1st octet, 2nd octet

Ex.
When default gateway IP address is 192.168.3.255: Un\G54 = H03FF, Un\G55 = HC0A8

IP address storage area write request

■IP address storage area write request (Un\G56)
Specify whether to write the stored values of 'IP address setting' (Un\G50 to Un\G51), 'Subnet mask pattern setting' (Un\G52
to Un\G53), and 'Default router IP address setting' (Un\G54 to Un\G55) to the IP address storage area.
• 0: Not write
• 1: Write

IP address storage area write status

■IP address storage area write status (Un\G57)
You can confirm whether or not the values are written to the IP address storage area when executing the IP address change
function.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G57 b0 IP address storage area write Turns on when writing to IP address storage area completes or fails.
completed Turns off when 'IP address storage area write request' (Un\G56) is changed from 1 to 0.
b1 IP address storage area write error Turns on when writing to IP address storage area fails. It turns on if there is a problem in
contents of IP address storage area, when power supply is turned from off to on.
Turns off when 'IP address storage area write request' (Un\G56) is changed from 1 to 0.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 145
 IP address storage area clear request
■IP address storage area clear request (Un\G58)
Specify whether to clear the data in the IP address storage area.
• 0: Not clear
• 1: Clear

IP address storage area clear status

■IP address storage area clear status (Un\G59)
You can confirm whether or not the IP address storage area is cleared.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G59 b0 IP address storage area clear Turns on when clearing of IP address storage area completes or fails.
completed Turns off when 'IP address storage area clear request' (Un\G58) is changed from 1 to 0.
b1 IP address storage area clear error Turns on when clearing of IP address storage area fails.
Turns off when 'IP address storage area clear request' (Un\G58) is changed from 1 to 0.

IP address change function enable flag

■IP address change function enable flag (Un\G60)
You can confirm whether or not the IP address change function is enabled.
• 0: Disable
• 1: Enable

IP address storage area write error code

■IP address storage area write error code (Un\G61)
Stores error codes if writing to IP address storage area fails.
• 0: Normal (no error)
• 1920H: Values of IP address setting and other settings (Un\G50 to Un\G55) are out of the setting ranges.

IP address storage area clear error code

■IP address storage area clear error code (Un\G62)
Stores error codes if clearing of IP address storage area fails.
• 0: Normal (no error)
• 1921H: 'IP address storage area write request' (Un\G56) and 'IP address storage area clear request' (Un\G58) were
simultaneously turned off and on.

IP address
■IP address (Un\G64 to Un\G65)
Stores IP address on the own station set with GX Works3. ( Page 69 Basic Setting) The stored values can be changed by
the IP address change function.
Address Description
Un\G64 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G65 1st octet, 2nd octet

Ex.
When IP address is 192.168.3.250: Un\G64 = H03FA, Un\G65 = HC0A8

If the IP address is changed by the IP address change function, priority will be given to the IP address stored
by the IP address change function. To enable the set value in GX Works3, clear the IP address storage area.

APPX
146 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Subnet mask pattern
■Subnet mask pattern (Un\G74 to Un\G75)
Stores subnet mask pattern on the own station set with GX Works3. ( Page 69 Basic Setting) The stored values can be
changed by the IP address change function.
Address Description
Un\G74 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G75 1st octet, 2nd octet

If the subnet mask pattern is changed by the IP address change function, priority will be given to the subnet
mask pattern stored by the IP address change function. To enable the set value in GX Works3, clear the IP
address storage area.

Ex.
When subnet mask pattern is 255.255.255.0: Un\G74 = HFF00, Un\G75 = HFFFF

Default gateway IP address

■Default gateway IP address (Un\G76 to Un\G77)
Stores default gateway IP address on the own station set with GX Works3. ( Page 69 Basic Setting) The stored values
can be changed by the IP address change function.
Address Description
Un\G76 3rd octet, 4th octet
Un\G77 1st octet, 2nd octet

Ex.
When default gateway IP address is 192.168.3.255: Un\G76 = H03FF, Un\G77 = HC0A8
A
If the default gateway IP address is changed by the IP address change function, priority will be given to the
default gateway IP address stored by the IP address change function. To enable the set value in GX Works3,
clear the IP address storage area.

Ethernet address (MAC address)

■Ethernet address (MAC address) (Un\G102 to Un\G104)
This stores Ethernet address (MAC address) on the own station.
Address Description
Un\G102 Serial ID
Un\G103 Lower one digit of vendor ID, model ID
Un\G104 Upper two digits of vendor ID

Ex.
When MAC address is 00-26-92-60-10-25: Un\G102 = H1025, Un\G103 = H9260, Un\G104 = H0026

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 147
 Error code
■Error code (Un\G108 to Un\G139)
This stores error codes (connection number 1 to 32) of general-purpose Ethernet. (0 is stored when communications are
normal.) For details on error code, refer to  Page 111 Module error.
Address Description
Un\G108 Stores error code of connection number 1.
Un\G109 Stores error code of connection number 2.

Un\G139 Stores error code of connection number 32.

Open completion signal

■Open completion signal (Un\G152 to Un\G153)
Open completion signal for each connection number.
Address Bit Connection number Description
Un\G152 b0 Connection number 1 • On: Open completed
• Off: Closed or not open
b1 Connection number 2

b15 Connection number 16
Un\G153 b0 to b15 Connection number 17 to 32

Open request signal

■Open request signal (Un\G154 to Un\G155)
Open request signal for each connection number of socket communication.
Address Bit Connection number Description
Un\G154 b0 Connection number 1 • On: Requesting open
b1 Connection number 2 • Off: No open request


b15 Connection number 16
Un\G155 b0 to b15 Connection number 17 to 32

Socket communications receive status signal

■Socket communications receive status signal (Un\G156 to Un\G157)
Socket communication receive state signal for each connection number.
Address Bit Connection number Description
Un\G156 b0 Connection number 1 • On: Data reception completed
• Off: Data not received
b1 Connection number 2

b15 Connection number 16
Un\G157 b0 to b15 Connection number 17 to 32

Initial status
■Initial status (Un\G158)
You can confirm whether or not FX5-ENET has been initialized.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G158 b0 Initial normal completion status Turns on when the initialization is normally completed.
b1 Initial abnormal completion status Turns on when the initialization is abnormally completed.

APPX
148 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Initial error code
■Initial error code (Un\G159)
The error codes that occur during initialization of FX5-ENET are stored. (0 is stored when communications are normal.)
For details on error code, refer to  Page 111 Module error.

Same IP address state storage area

■Same IP address state storage area (Un\G201)
Same IP address state is stored.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G201 b0 Same IP address detection flag Turns on if there is a same IP address.

MAC address of the already connected station

■MAC address of the already connected station (Un\G202 to Un\G204)
Stores the MAC address of the station, which was connected to the network earlier, in the station with duplicated IP address.
Address Description
Un\G202 Serial ID
Un\G203 Lower one digit of vendor ID, model ID
Un\G204 Upper two digits of vendor ID

Ex.
When MAC address is 00-26-92-60-10-25: Un\G202 = H1025, Un\G203 = H9260, Un\G204 = H0026
"FFFFFFFFFFFFH" is stored in the station that has been already connected to the network.

MAC address of the station connected later

■MAC address of the station connected later (Un\G205 to Un\G207)
Stores the MAC address of the station with duplicated IP address in the station which was connected earlier to the network.
A
Address Description
Un\G205 Serial ID
Un\G206 Lower one digit of vendor ID, model ID
Un\G207 Upper two digits of vendor ID

Ex.
When MAC address is 00-26-92-60-10-25: Un\G205 = H1025, Un\G206 = H9260, Un\G207 = H0026
"FFFFFFFFFFFFH" is stored in the station with duplicated IP address.

"Communication start at request" request

■"Communication start at request" request (Un\G300, Un\G301)
When the communication setting is "requested", start of data transmission in the simple CPU communication is requested.
Address Bit Setting No. Description
Un\G300 b0 Setting No.1 • On: Requested
• Off: Not requested
b1 Setting No.2

b15 Setting No.16
Un\G301 b0 to b15 Setting No.17 to 32

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 149
 Periodic communication stop request
■Periodic communication stop request (Un\G304, Un\G305)
When the communication setting is "Fixed", stop of data transmission in the simple CPU communication is requested.
Address Bit Setting No. Description
Un\G304 b0 Setting No.1 • On: Requested
• Off: Not requested
b1 Setting No.2

b15 Setting No.16
Un\G305 b0 to b15 Setting No.17 to 32

Periodic communication restart request

■Periodic communication restart request (Un\G308, Un\G309)
When the communication setting is "Fixed", restart of data transmission in the simple CPU communication is requested.
Address Bit Setting No. Description
Un\G308 b0 Setting No.1 • On: Requested
• Off: Not requested
b1 Setting No.2

b15 Setting No.16
Un\G309 b0 to b15 Setting No.17 to 32

Execution Status flag

■Execution Status flag (Un\G312, Un\G313)
The data transmission/reception status of the simple CPU communication is stored.
Address Bit Setting No. Description
Un\G312 b0 Setting No.1 • On: During execution
b1 Setting No.2 • Off: Unexecuted


b15 Setting No.16
Un\G313 b0 to b15 Setting No.17 to 32

Ready
■Ready (Un\G316, Un\G317)
The preparation completion status of the simple CPU communication is stored.
Address Bit Setting No. Description
Un\G316 b0 Setting No.1 • On: Ready
• Off: Not ready
b1 Setting No.2

b15 Setting No.16
Un\G317 b0 to b15 Setting No.17 to 32

APPX
150 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Simple CPU communication status
■Simple CPU communication status (Un\G352 to Un\G383)
The simple CPU communication status is stored.
Address Setting No. Description
Un\G352 Setting No.1 • 0H: Unset
• 1H: Preparing
Un\G353 Setting No.2
• 2H: Waiting for request
 • 3H: Communicating
Un\G382 Setting No.31 • 4H: Communication stop
• 5H: Retry being executed
Un\G383 Setting No.32
• 6H: Monitoring
• AH: Communications impossible

Simple CPU error code

■Simple CPU error code (Un\G416 to Un\G447)
The cause (CFB0H to CFBFH) of the error detected in the simple CPU communication is stored. For details on error code,
refer to  Page 119 Ethernet communication error.
Address Description
Un\G416 The error code of the setting No.1 is stored.
Un\G417 The error code of the setting No.2 is stored.

Un\G447 The error code of the setting No.32 is stored.

Abnormal response code

■Abnormal response code (Un\G480 to Un\G511)
The abnormal response code detected in the simple CPU communication is stored.
Address Description A
Un\G480 The abnormal response code of the setting No.1 is stored.
Un\G481 The abnormal response code of the setting No.2 is stored.

Un\G511 The abnormal response code of the setting No.32 is stored.

Execution interval (current value)

■Execution interval (current value) (Un\G544 to Un\G575)
The execution interval of the simple CPU is stored.
Address Description
Un\G544 The execution interval of the setting No.1 is stored.
Un\G545 The execution interval of the setting No.2 is stored.

Un\G575 The execution interval of the setting No.32 is stored.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 151
 Remote input (RX)
■Remote input (RX) (Un\G1000 to Un\G1127)
This stores the input data (bit unit) sent from the remote station to the master station (FX5-ENET) with cyclic transmission.
Address Bit Remote input Description
Un\G1000 b0 RX0 • On: Remote input is turned on.
• Off: Remote input is turned off.
b1 RX1

b15 RXF

Un\G1127 b0 to b15 RX7F0 to RX7FF

Remote output (RY)

■Remote output (RY) (Un\G1256 to Un\G1383)
Set the output data (bit unit) to be sent from the master station (FX5-ENET) to the remote station with cyclic transmission.
Address Bit Remote output Description
Un\G1256 b0 RY0 • On: Remote output is turned on.
• Off: Remote output is turned off.
b1 RY1

b15 RYF

Un\G1383 b0 to b15 RY7F0 to RY7FF

Remote register (RWr)

■Remote register (RWr) (Un\G2000 to Un\G3023)
This stores the input data (word unit) sent from the remote station to the master station (FX5-ENET) with cyclic transmission.
Address Remote register Description
Un\G2000 RWr0 0 to 32768
Un\G2001 RWr1

Un\G3023 RWr3FF

Remote register (RWw)

■Remote register (RWw) (Un\G3024 to Un\G4047)
Set the output data (word unit) to be sent from the master station (FX5-ENET) to the remote station with cyclic transmission.
Address Remote register Description
Un\G3024 RWw0 0 to 32768
Un\G3025 RWw1

Un\G4047 RWw3FF

APPX
152 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Cyclic transmission status of each station
■Cyclic transmission status of each station (Un\G4100 to Un\G4101)
Stores the remote station cyclic transmission state for each station No.
Address Bit Station number Description
Un\G4100 b0 Station 1 • On: Being performed
• Off: Not performed
b1 Station 2

b15 Station 16
Un\G4101 b0 to b15 Station 17 to 32

• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.

• The status is not stored for the reserved stations and the station numbers after the maximum station
number.
• Use this buffer memory as an interlock for cyclic transmission. ( Page 93 Interlock Programs of Cyclic
Transmission)

Data link status of each station

■Data link status of each station (Un\G4104 to Un\G4105)
Stores the remote station data link status for each station No.
Address Bit Station number Description
Un\G4104 b0 Station 1 • On: Faulty station
b1 Station 2 • Off: Normally operating station


b15 Station 16
Un\G4105 b0 to b15 Station 17 to 32 A
*1 This status includes the case where a remote station has not responded to the first request from the master station due to a power-off of
the remote station. (The remote station is not judged as a faulty station because the data link status is not determined.)

• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.

• The status is not stored for the reserved stations and the station numbers after the maximum station
number.
• This buffer memory can be used to monitor errors in remote stations, connected cables, and a connected
hub.

Total number of connected stations

■Total number of connected stations (Un\G4112)
The total number of connected stations set in GX Works3 is stored. ( Page 71 )

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 153
 Reserved station specification status of each station
■Reserved station specification status of each station (Un\G4113 to Un\G4114)
Stores the setting state of the reserved station set with GX Works3. ( Page 71 )
Address Bit Station number Description
Un\G4113 b0 Station 1 • On: Reserved station
• Off: Other than reserved station
b1 Station 2
b2 Station 3

b15 Station 16
Un\G4114 b0 to b15 Station 17 to 32

• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.

• The status is not stored for the reserved stations and the station numbers after the maximum station
number.

Link scan information (group number 1)

■Link scan information (group number 1) (Un\G4117 to Un\G4119)
Link scan information of group number 1 is stored.
Address Name Description
Un\G4117 Maximum link scan time (Unit: ms) The maximum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)
Un\G4118 Minimum link scan time (Unit: ms) The minimum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)
Un\G4119 Current link scan time (Unit: ms) The current link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)

Link scan information (group number 2)

■Link scan information (group number 2) (Un\G4121 to Un\G4123)
Link scan information of group number 2 is stored.
Address Name Description
Un\G4121 Maximum link scan time (Unit: ms) The maximum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)
Un\G4122 Minimum link scan time (Unit: ms) The minimum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)
Un\G4123 Current link scan time (Unit: ms) The current link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored. (Unit: ms)

Diagnostic request information

■Diagnostic request information (Un\G4127)
Specify a remote station number whose diagnostic information (Un\G4129 to Un\G4159) is to be displayed.
• 0: Not specify
• 1 to 32: Displays the diagnostic information for the specified station number.

APPX
154 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Diagnostic information status flag
■Diagnostic information status flag (Un\G4128)
After the END instruction of the scan where the bit 0 of 'Diagnostic information display request' (Un\G4162) is turned off and
on is executed, the status (valid or invalid) of diagnostic information (Diagnostic information 1, Diagnostic information 2) of the
remote station specified in 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is stored.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G4128 b0 to b7 Diagnostic information 1 • On: Valid
• Off: Invalid
b8 to b15 Diagnostic information 2

The valid/invalid conditions are given below.

• If the station number of the remote station that is specified in 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is the start station
number of the occupied stations and the cyclic transmission is performed for the remote station, 1 is stored in b0 to b7 and
b8 to b15. (If the specified remote station is a reserved station, 0 is stored in b8 to b15.)
• If the station number of the remote station that is specified in 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is other than the
start station number of the occupied stations or the cyclic transmission is not performed for the remote station, 0 is stored in
b0 to b7 and b8 to b15.
• When b0 to b7 are valid, the number of occupied stations, group number, IP address, the accumulated number of timeouts,
and the accumulated number of disconnection detection are stored in 'Diagnostic information 1' (Un\G4129 to Un\G4143).
When invalid, 0 is stored in 'Diagnostic information 1' (Un\G4129 to Un\G4143).
• When b8 to b15 are valid, the manufacturer code, model code, device version, module information, error code, and detailed
module information are stored in 'Diagnostic information 2' (Un\G4144 to Un\G4159). When invalid, 0 is stored in
'Diagnostic information 2' (Un\G4144 to Un\G4159).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 155
 Diagnostic information 1
■Diagnostic information 1 (Un\G4129 to Un\G4143)
When 1 (valid) is stored in b0 to b7 of 'Diagnostic information status flag' (Un\G4128), the number of occupied stations, group
number, IP address, the accumulated number of timeouts, and the accumulated number of disconnection detection are
stored.
When 0 (invalid) is stored in b0 to b7 of 'Diagnostic information status flag' (Un\G4128), 0 is stored.
Address Name Description
Un\G4129 Number of occupied stations Number of occupied stations in a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4130 Group number*1 Group number in a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4131 IP address*1 IP address (3rd octet, 4th octet) in a remote station specified is stored.*2
Un\G4132 IP address (1st octet, 2nd octet) in a remote station specified is stored.*2
Un\G4133 to System area 
Un\G4138
Un\G4139 Accumulated number of timeouts After the END instruction of the scan where the bit 0 of 'Diagnostic information
display request' (Un\G4162) is turned off and on is executed, the accumulated
number of timeouts that occurred in a remote station specified in 'Diagnostic
request information' (Un\G4127) is stored.
• 0: No timeouts
• 1 to 65535: Number of timeouts (accumulated number)*3
Un\G4140 Accumulated number of disconnection detection After the END instruction of the scan where the bit 0 of 'Diagnostic information
display request' (Un\G4162) is turned off and on is executed, the accumulated
number of disconnections that detected in a remote station specified in 'Diagnostic
request information' (Un\G4127) is stored.
• 0: No disconnections
• 1 to 65535: Number of disconnection detection (accumulated number)*3
Un\G4141 to System area 
Un\G4143

*1 The value set with GX Works3 is stored. ( Page 71 )

*2 When the IP address has not been set in the parameter, 0 is stored.
*3 When the count exceeds 65535, counting is continued from 1 again.

If the remote station specified with 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is disconnected, the
information just before the disconnection is stored.

APPX
156 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
Diagnostic information 2
■Diagnostic information 2 (Un\G4144 to Un\G4159)
When Diagnostic information 2 is valid (1 is stored in b8 to b15 of 'Diagnostic information status flag' (Un\G4128)), the
manufacturer code, model code, device version, module information, error code, and detailed module information are stored.
When Diagnostic information 2 is invalid (0 is stored in b8 to b15 of 'Diagnostic information status flag' (Un\G4128)), 0 is
stored.
Address Name Description
Un\G4144 Manufacturer code Manufacturer code of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4145 System area 
Un\G4146 Model code Model code (lower) of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4147 Model code (upper) of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4148 Device version Device version of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4149 System area 
Un\G4150 Own station module information Module information of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4151 Error code Latest error code of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4152 Detailed module information Detailed module information (lower) of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4153 Detailed module information (upper) of a remote station specified is stored.
Un\G4154 to System area 
Un\G4159

If the remote station specified with 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is disconnected, the
information just before the disconnection is stored.

CCIEF Basic each status

■CCIEF Basic each status (Un\G4160)
Each status of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is stored.
A
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G4160 b0 Cyclic transmission status This register turns on when initial process is completed. Turns off when the cyclic
transmission is stopped because of an error, etc.
• Off: Not performed
• On: Being performed
b1 Data link status This register turns on when the 'Data link status of each station' (Un\G4104 to
Un\G4105) is on for even one station.
• Off: All stations normal
• On: One or more faulty stations
b2 Reserved station specification status This register turns on when the 'Reserved station specification status' (Un\G4113 to
Un\G4114) is on for even one station.
• Off: Not specified
• On: Specified

Diagnostic information display request

■Diagnostic information display request (Un\G4162)
The diagnostic information of the remote station that is specified by the 'Diagnostic request information' (Un\G4127) is read to
Un\G4128 to Un\G4159 after execution of the END instruction of the scan where bit 0 turns off and on.
0 is stored if the setting of the diagnostic information is completed during the END process.
Address Bit Name Description
Un\G4162 b0 Diagnostic information display request • Off: Diagnostic information display not requested
• On: Diagnostic information display request

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 157
 Diagnostic information display request execution status
■Diagnostic information display request execution status (Un\G4163)
This area stores the execution status of the diagnostic information display following the 'Diagnostic information display
request' (Un\G4162).
• 0: Diagnostic information display not requested
• 1: Diagnostic information display requested
• 2: Diagnostic information display completed

E-mail send function

■TLS setting (Un\G4173)
The enable/disable setting of the TLS setting is stored.
• 0: Disable
• 1: Enable

■Sender mail address (Un\G4174 to Un\G4205)

This area stores the sender mail address (up to 64 characters in ASCII format).

■Sender name (Un\G4206 to Un\G4269)

This area stores the sender name (up to 64 characters in UTF-16 format).

■SMTP server specification method (Un\G4270)

This area stores the SMTP server specification method.
• 0: Host name specification
• 1: IP address specification

■SMTP server name / IP address (Un\G4271 to Un\G4302)

When host name specification is set, the host name (up to 64 characters in ASCII format) is stored.
When IP address specification is set, the IP address (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254) is stored.

■SMTP port number (Un\G4303)

This area stores an SMTP server port number (1 to 65565).

■Authentication method (Un\G4304)

This area stores SMTP authentication method.
• 0: No authentication
• 1: SMTP-AUTH

■User name (Un\G4305 to Un\G4336)

This area stores the user name (in ASCII format).
This area is not available when Authentication method (Un\G4304) is 0 (No authentication).

■Password (Un\G4337 to Un\G4368)

When the account information is set from the buffer memory, the password (in ASCII format) is stored.
When the account information registration is completed, the set value is cleared.
This area is not available when Authentication method (Un\G4304) is 0 (No authentication).

■Certificate verification setting (Un\G4369)

This area stores the setting whether to verify a certificate received from the server.
• 0: Not to verify certificate
• 1: Verify certificate

APPX
158 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
E-mail setting change function
■E-mail setting storage area write request (Un\G4370)
When this area is changed from 0 to 1 or from 0 to 2, the e-mail settings stored in E-mail send function (Un\G4173 to
Un\G4369) are written to the external flash ROM.
• 0: No write request
• 1: Requesting write
• 2: Requesting write (no password change)

■E-mail setting storage area write status (Un\G4371)

This area stores the e-mail setting write request result.
E-mail setting storage area write completed (Un\G4371.b0)
The status will be 1 (Completed) when writing to the e-mail setting storage area completes or fails.
The status will be 0 (Not completed) when E-mail setting storage area write request (Un\G4370) is changed from 1 to 0 or
from 2 to 0.
• 0: Not completed
• 1: Completed
E-mail setting storage area write error (Un\G4371.b1)
The status will be 1 (Error) when writing to the e-mail setting storage area fails.
The status will be 1 (Error) if there is a problem in contents of the e-mail setting storage area when the power supply is turned
from off to on.
The status will be 0 (Normal) when 'E-mail setting storage area write request' (Un\G4370) is changed from 1 to 0 or from 2 to
0.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Error

■E-mail setting storage area clear request (Un\G4372)

When this area is changed from 0 to 1, the e-mail settings are cleared from the external flash ROM.
• 0: No clear request A
• 1: Requesting clear

■E-mail setting storage area clear status (Un\G4373)

This area stores the e-mail setting clear request result.
E-mail setting storage area clear completed (Un\G4373.b0)
The status will be 1 (Completed) when clearing of the e-mail setting storage area completes or fails.
The status will be 0 (Not completed) when 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Not completed
• 1: Completed
E-mail setting storage area clear error (Un\G4373.b1)
The status will be 1 (Error) when clearing of the e-mail setting storage area fails.
The status will be 0 (Normal) when 'E-mail setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4372) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Error

■E-mail setting change function enable flag (Un\G4374)

This area stores whether an engineering tool or external flash ROM is used for the e-mail setting.
• 0: Setting values from an engineering tool
• 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

■E-mail setting storage area write error code (Un\G4375)

If an e-mail setting write request is completed with an error, the error code is stored.
• 0: Normal
• Other than 0: Error code

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 159
 ■E-mail setting storage area clear error code (Un\G4376)
If an e-mail setting clear request is completed with an error, the error code is stored.
• 0: Normal
• Other than 0: Error code

E-mail send function (for diagnostics)

■Error code (Un\G4377)
This area stores an error code at e-mail sending.
• 0: Normal
• Other than 0: Error code

■E-mail sending result (Un\G4378)

This area stores whether the sending was completed successfully or failed for each destination.
(b0 = setting 1, b1 = setting 2…, b9 = setting 10)
• 0: Completed successfully
• 1: Failed

■E-mail sending result (direct specification) (Un\G4379)

This area stores whether the sending was completed successfully or failed for each destination. (Direct specification)
(b0 = setting 1, b1 = setting 2…, b15 = setting 16)
When an error occurs in a communication with the SMTP server or DNS server, FFFFH will be stored.
• 0: Completed successfully
• 1: Failed

■Communication status (Un\G4380)

This area stores the communication status during e-mail sending.
When the execution command of a module function block is turned on and off, the status will be 0000H (Initial state).
• 0000H: Initial state
• 0001H: E-mail sending completed successfully
• 0002H: E-mail sending completed with an error
• 8000H: E-mail sending in progress

■Number of cases in which the function block was completed successfully (Un\G4381)
This area stores the accumulated number of cases in which the e-mail sending function block was completed successfully.
• 0: The instruction has not yet been executed or completed successfully.
• 1 or greater: Number of cases in which the instruction was successfully completed

■Number of cases in which the function block was completed with an error (Un\G4382)
This area stores the accumulated number of cases in which the e-mail sending function block was completed with an error.
• 0: The instruction has not yet been executed or completed with an error.
• 1 or greater: Number of cases in which the instruction was completed with an error

■Number of mails completed successfully (Un\G4383)

This area stores the accumulated number of cases in which a sent e-mail was transferred to the outgoing mail server.
• 0: An e-mail has not yet been sent.
• 1 or greater: Number of cases in which an e-mail was sent successfully

■Number of cases in which an attachment was sent (Un\G4384)

This area stores the accumulated number of cases in which an e-mail with an attachment file was sent.
• 0: An e-mail with an attachment has not yet been sent.
• 1 or greater: Number of cases in which an e-mail an attachment was sent successfully

■Number of cases in which an e-mail was sent to the server (Un\G4385)

This area stores the accumulated number of cases in which an e-mail was sent to the outgoing mail server.
• 0: An e-mail has not yet been sent to the server.
• 1 or greater: Accumulated number of cases in which an e-mail was sent to the server

APPX
160 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
■Number of e-mails completed with an error (Un\G4386)
This area stores the accumulated number of communication errors returned when a send request was made to the outgoing
mail server.
• 0: A communication error has not yet been returned from the server, or a send request has not yet been made.
• 1 or greater: Accumulated number of communication errors

DNS setting
■DNS server address 1 (Un\G4390 to Un\G4391)
This area stores DNS server address 1.
• 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

■DNS server address 2 (Un\G4392 to Un\G4393)

This area stores DNS server address 2.
• 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

■DNS server address 3 (Un\G4394 to Un\G4395)

This area stores DNS server address 3.
• 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

■DNS server address 4 (Un\G4396 to Un\G4397)

This area stores DNS server address 4.
• 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

DNS setting change function

■DNS setting storage area write request (Un\G4398)
When this area is changed from 0 to 1, the DNS settings stored in the DNS server address areas (Un\G4390 to Un\G4397)
are written to the external flash ROM.
• 0: No write request
• 1: Requesting write A
■DNS setting storage area write status (Un\G4399)
This area stores the DNS setting write request result.
DNS setting storage area write completed (Un\G4399.b0)
The status will be 1 (Completed) when writing to the DNS setting storage area completes or fails.
The status will be 0 (Not completed) when DNS setting storage area write request (Un\G4398) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Not completed
• 1: Completed
DNS setting storage area write error (Un\G4399.b1)
The status will be 1 (Error) when writing to the DNS setting storage area fails.
Also, the status will be 1 (Error) if there is a problem in contents of the DNS setting storage area when the power supply is
turned from off to on.
The status will be 0 (Normal) when 'DNS setting storage area write request' (Un\G4398) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Error

■DNS setting storage area clear request (Un\G4400)

When this area is changed from 0 to 1, the DNS settings are cleared from the external flash ROM.
• 0: No clear request
• 1: Requesting clear

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 161
 ■DNS setting storage area clear status (Un\G4401)
This area stores the DNS setting clear request result.
DNS setting storage area clear completed (Un\G4401.b0)
The status will be 1 (Completed) when clearing of the DNS setting storage area completes or fails.
The status will be 0 (Not completed) when 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Not completed
• 1: Completed
DNS setting storage area clear error (Un\G4401.b1)
The status will be 1 (Error) when clearing of the DNS setting storage area fails.
The status will be 0 (Normal) when 'DNS setting storage area clear request' (Un\G4400) is changed from 1 to 0.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Error

■DNS setting change function enable flag (Un\G4402)

This area stores whether an engineering tool or external flash ROM is used for the DNS settings.
• 0: Setting values from an engineering tool
• 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

■DNS setting storage area write error code (Un\G4403)

If a DNS setting write request is completed with an error, the error code is stored.
• 0: Normal
• Other than 0: Error code

■DNS setting storage area clear error code (Un\G4404)

If a DNS setting clear request is completed with an error, the error code is stored.
• 0: Normal
• Other than 0: Error code

Area for simple CPU communication

■Area for simple CPU communication (Un\G6400 to Un\G8447)
Usable as a device that can be specified for the own station in the simple CPU communication. (Word device in units of 1
point)

Function to change MQTT connection settings

■MQTT connection setting storage area write request (Un\G108801)
The MQTT connection settings are saved and reflected.
• 0: Not executed
• 1: Execute
• 2: Execute (no password change)

■MQTT connection setting storage area write status (Un\G108802)

This area stores the MQTT connection setting write status.
Bit Status
b0 0 Not completed
1 Completed
b1 0 Normal
1 Error

■MQTT connection setting storage area clear request (Un\G108803)

The MQTT connection settings are deleted.
• 0: Not executed
• 1: Execute

APPX
162 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
■MQTT connection setting storage area clear status (Un\G108804)
This area stores the MQTT connection setting deletion status.
Bit Status
b0 0 Not completed
1 Completed
b1 0 Normal
1 Error

■MQTT connection setting change function enable flag (Un\G108805)

This area stores the source information of the MQTT connection settings that are currently reflected.
• 0: Setting values from GX Works3
• 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

■MQTT connection setting storage area write error code (Un\G108806)

This area stores the error code of when writing of the MQTT connection setting fails.
When completed successfully, this area is cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned from off to on or the CPU module is
reset.
• 0: No error
• Other than 0: Refer to the list of error codes.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

■MQTT connection setting storage area clear error code (Un\G108807)

This area stores the error code of when deletion of the MQTT connection setting fails.
When completed successfully, this area is cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned from off to on or the CPU module is
reset.
• 0: No error
• Other than 0: Refer to the list of error codes.
Page 110 List of Error Codes
A
MQTT connection setting (connection 1)
■Connection number (Un\G108808)
This area stores the connection number to be used for MQTT communication.
• 1 to 32

■TCP or TLS (Un\G108809)

Specify whether to use encryption in MQTT communication.
• 0: TCP
• 1: TLS

■MQTT client port number (Un\G108810)

Specify the ENET-side port number for MQTT communication.
• 1 to 5548, 5570 to 65534

■MQTT server specification method (Un\G108811)

Select an MQTT server (MQTT broker) specification method.
• 0: Host name specification
• 1: IP address specification

■MQTT server host name storage address (Un\G108812 to Un\G108813)

Specify an MQTT server (MQTT broker) host name storage location BFM address.
Set the number of characters at the top (one word) of the storage location.
Set the host name in ASCII format following the number of characters. (One or more characters)
Valid only when 'MQTT server specification method' (Un\G108811) is 0 (Host name specification).
• 109007 to 109506

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 163
 ■MQTT server IP address (Un\G108814 to Un\G108815)
Set an MQTT server (MQTT broker) IP address.
Use this when IP address specification is set.
• 00000001H to DFFFFFFEH

■MQTT server port number (Un\G108816)

Specify an MQTT server (MQTT broker) port number.
• 1 to 65534

■Client ID storage address (Un\G108817 to Un\G108818)

Specify a client ID storage location BFM address.
Set the number of characters at the top (one word) of the storage location.
Set the client ID in UTF-16 format following the number of characters. (One or more characters)
• 109007 to 109506

■User name storage address (Un\G108819 to Un\G108820)

Specify a user name storage location BFM address.
Set the number of characters at the top (one word) of the storage location.
Set the user name in UTF-16 format following the number of characters. (0 or more characters)
When user authentication is not required, both the user name and password are set to 0 characters.
• 109007 to 109506

■Password storage address (Un\G108821 to Un\G108822)

Specify a password storage location BFM address.
Set the number of characters at the top (one word) of the storage location.
Set the password in ASCII format following the number of characters. (0 or more characters)
When user authentication is not required, both the user name and password are set to 0 characters.
This area is not written when 2 (Execute (no password change)) is selected for the write execution.
• 109007 to 109506

■Server certificate verification (Un\G108823)

Select whether to check the server certificate.
This setting is available only when TLS is selected in the external device configuration.
• 0: Not verify
• 1: Verify

Tool setting change function

■Tool setting storage area write request (Un\G108872)
The tool settings are saved and reflected.
• 0: Not executed
• 1: Execute
• 2: Execute (no password change)

■Tool setting storage area write status (Un\G108873)

This area stores the tool setting write status.
Bit Status
b0 0 Not completed
1 Completed
b1 0 Normal
1 Error

■Tool setting storage area clear request (Un\G108874)

The tool settings are deleted.
• 0: Not executed
• 1: Execute

APPX
164 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
■Tool setting storage area clear status (Un\G108875)
This area stores the tool setting deletion status.
Bit Status
b0 0 Not completed
1 Completed
b1 0 Normal
1 Error

■Tool setting change function enable flag (Un\G108876)

This area stores the source information of the tool settings that are currently reflected.
• 0: Setting values from GX Works3
• 1: Setting values registered to a flash ROM by using the buffer memory

■Tool setting storage area write error code (Un\G108877)

This area stores the error code of when writing of the tool setting fails.
When completed successfully, this area is cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned from off to on or the CPU module is
reset.
• 0: No error
• Other than 0: Refer to the list of error codes.
Page 110 List of Error Codes

■Tool setting storage area clear error code (Un\G108878)

This area stores the error code of when deletion of the tool setting fails.
When completed successfully, this area is cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned from off to on or the CPU module is
reset.
• 0: No error
• Other than 0: Refer to the list of error codes.
Page 110 List of Error Codes
A
Tool setting
■Certificate Configuration Tool connection control setting (Un\G108879)
• 0: Connection disable
• 1: Password Authentication
• 2: Connection enable

■Certificate Configuration Tool password (Un\G108880 to Un\G108895)

Set the password with 6 to 31 characters in ASCII format.
The set value is enabled only when password authentication is selected for the connection control setting.
This area is not written when 2 (Execute (no password change)) is selected for the write execution.

Certificate diagnostic information

■Certificate expiration within 90 days flag (Un\G108897)
This flag turns on when a client certificate will expire within 90 days.
• 0: 91 days or more until expiration
• 1: 90 days or less until expiration

■Expired certificate flag (Un\G108898)

This flag turns on when a client certificate has expired.
• 0: Not yet expired
• 1: Expired

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 165
 ■Certificate function ready-to-enable state (Un\G108899)
This area shows whether the functions (e-mail function and MQTT communication function) that use certificates finish reading
certificates and are ready for communications.
After the functions that use certificates are ready for communications, b1 and b0 of this buffer memory are turned on.
• b0: MQTT communication function
• b1: E-mail function
When the communication protocol with the external device used for the e-mail function or the MQTT communication function
is set to TCP, b1 and b0 of this buffer memory are unconditionally turned on for each function.

MQTT diagnostic information (overall)

■MQTT function status (Un\G108900)
This area stores MQTT function operating status.
• 0: Disable
• 1: Being executed
• 2: Stop

■Session status (Un\G108901)

b0 to b2: Session 1

■Latest error code (Un\G108902)

This area stores the latest error code.

MQTT connection diagnostics

■Connection number (Un\G108903)
This area stores the connection number of the connected session.
• 1 to 32

■Session status (Un\G108904)

This area stores the status of the connected session.
• 0: Not connected
• 1: Establishing connection

■Will setting (Un\G108907)

This area stores Will status, QoS, and Retain of the connected session. b0: Will status
• On: Valid
• Off: Invalid
b2 and 1: Will QoS (0 to 2)
b3: Will Retain
• On: Valid
• Off: Invalid

■Connection time (minutes) (Un\G108908 to Un\G108909)

This area stores the connection time (in minutes) of the connected session.

■Receive count (Un\G108910 to Un\G108911)

This area stores the receive count in the connected session.

■Total receive size (byte) (Un\G108912 to Un\G108913)

This area stores the total receive size (in bytes) in the connected session.

■Transmission count (Un\G108914 to Un\G108915)

This area stores the transmission count in the connected session.

■Total transmission size (byte) (Un\G108916 to Un\G108917)

This area stores the total transmission size (in bytes) in the connected session.

■Number of discarded packets (Un\G108918 to Un\G108919)

This area stores the number of discarded packets in the connected session.

APPX
166 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory
■Latest error code (session) (Un\G108920)
This area stores the latest error code (session).

MQTT function operation information

■MQTT connection: communication status (Un\G108975)
This area stores the communication status for FB: MQTT_Connect output.
• 0: Not connected
• 1: Connecting
• 2: Communication established
• 3: Communication established (with permanent session)
• 4: Disconnected

■MQTT connection: Error code (Un\G108976)

This area stores the error code for FB: MQTT_Connect output.

■MQTT Publish sending: Communication status (Un\G108977)

This area stores the communication status for FB: MQTT_PublishSend output.

■MQTT Publish sending: Error code (Un\G108978)

This area stores the error code for FB: MQTT_PublishSend output.

■MQTT Subscribe sending: Communication status (Un\G108979)

This area stores the communication status for FB: MQTT_Subscribe output.

■MQTT Subscribe sending: Error code (Un\G108980)

This area stores the error code for FB: MQTT_Subscribe output.

■MQTT receiving: communication status (Un\G108981)

This area stores the communication status for FB: MQTT_Receive output.

■MQTT receiving: Error code (Un\G108982)

This area stores the error code for FB: MQTT_Receive output. A
MQTT connection setting (string)
■MQTT server host name: Number of characters (Un\G109007)
Set the number of MQTT server (MQTT broker) host name characters.

■MQTT server host name (Un\G109008 to Un\G109106)

Specify an MQTT server (MQTT broker) host name.

■Client ID: Number of characters (Un\G109107)

Set the number of client ID characters.

■Client ID (Un\G109108 to Un\G109306)

Specify a client ID.

■User name: Number of characters (Un\G109307)

Set the number of user name characters.

■User name (Un\G109308 to Un\G109406)

Specify the user name.

■Password: Number of characters (Un\G109407)

Set the number of MQTT server (MQTT broker) host name characters.

■Password (Un\G109408 to Un\G109506)

Specify the password.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory 167
 Appendix 5 Processing Time
The processing time of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic consists of the time components below.
Sequence scan time + Link scan time + Remote station response processing time = Transmission delay time

Master station Remote station

Device Link device Link device

External
device
Link scan Response processing
Sequence time
scan time time of remote station

External
device

For scan time, refer to  MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Application).
For remote station response processing time, refer to manual for the remote station used.
For transmission delay time, refer to  Page 169 Transmission delay time.

APPX
168 Appendix 5 Processing Time
Transmission delay time
A transmission delay time includes an input transmission delay time and an output transmission delay time.

Input transmission delay time

The input transmission delay time means the following.
• Time between when a signal (RX) is input to the remote station and when a device of the master station turns on or off
• Time between when data (RWr) is input to the remote station and when the data is stored in a device of the master station
The formula for calculating the input transmission delay time (maximum) is shown below.
Input transmission
SM Ls SS (ms)
delay time (maximum)

SM: Sequence scan time (ms)

Ls: Link scan time (ms)
SS: Processing time required for the remote station to reflect the input (ms) (Refer to the manual for the remote station used.)

Output transmission delay time

The output transmission delay time means the following.
• Time between when a device of the master station turns on or off and when the output (RY) of the remote station turns on
or off
• Time between when data is set to a device of the master station and when the data (RWw) is output to the remote station
The formula for calculating the output transmission delay time (maximum) is shown below.
Output transmission
SM Ls SS (ms)
delay time (maximum)

SM: Sequence scan time (ms)

Ls: Link scan time (ms)
SS: Processing time required for the remote station to reflect the output (ms) (Refer to the manual for the remote station used.)

APPX
Appendix 5 Processing Time 169
 Appendix 6 Software Licenses and Copyrights
This section describes the licenses and copyrights of software used in this product.

MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

This product includes code that was developed by RSA Data Security, Inc.
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc.

License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-
Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA
Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of
this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.

These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

APPX
170 Appendix 6 Software Licenses and Copyrights
Appendix 7 Added and Changed Functions
This appendix shows the functions added to FX5-ENET and engineering tool or changed functions, the firmware versions of
the appropriate FX5-ENET and CPU module and the software version of the engineering tool.
The firmware version of the FX5-ENET can be found in the buffer memory. ( Page 144 Firmware version)
The firmware version of the CPU module can be checked with module diagnosis (CPU diagnosis). For the module diagnosis
(CPU diagnosis), refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
For the software version, refer to GX Works3 Operating Manual.

FX5UJ CPU module

Add/Change Function Applicable versions Reference
Firmware version Firmware version Software version of
of the CPU module of the FX5-ENET the engineering
tool
MELSOFT connection "1.010" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
SLMP communication types "1.010" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
Simple CPU communication function "1.010" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
BACnet function "1.010" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet
Reference Manual
E-mail function "1.040" and above "1.200" and above*1 "1.095Z" and above Page 26 E-mail function
MQTT communication function "1.040" and above "1.200" and above*1 "1.095Z" and above Page 46 MQTT communication
function

*1 Supported with the module serial No.234**** and above.

FX5U/FX5UC CPU module A

Add/Change Function Applicable versions Reference
Firmware version Firmware version Software version of
of the CPU module of the FX5-ENET the engineering
tool
Firmware update function "1.240" and above “1.003“ and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Application)
MELSOFT connection "1.240" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
SLMP communication types "1.240" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
Simple CPU communication function "1.240" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual
(Communication)
BACnet function "1.240" and above "1.100" and above "1.075D" and above MELSEC iQ-F FX5 BACnet
Reference Manual
E-mail function "1.280" and above "1.200" and above*1 "1.095Z" and above Page 26 E-mail function
MQTT communication function "1.280" and above "1.200" and above*1 "1.095Z" and above Page 46 MQTT communication
function

*1 Supported with the module serial No.234**** and above.

APPX
Appendix 7 Added and Changed Functions 171
 INDEX

A R
Automatic return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Remote station disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

B S
BACnet function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Simple CPU communication function . . . . . . . . . .24
SLMP communication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Socket communication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
C
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Diagnostics . . . 104
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic diagnostics . . . . . 25
Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connected module search function . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Constant link scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Cyclic data integrity assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

D
Data communication using link devices . . . . . . . . 24
Direct connection with MELSOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DNS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

E
E-mail function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ethernet diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,99
Event history function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,103

F
Firmware update function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

G
Group number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

H
Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Hardware test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

I
IP address change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IP filter function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

L
Link refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

M
MELSOFT connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MELSOFT diagnosis function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Module diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Module error clear request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Module ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MQTT communication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

172
MEMO

173
 REVISIONS
Revision date Revision Description
October 2018 A First Edition
October 2019 B ■Added models
FX5UJ CPU module
■Added or modified parts
RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 2.3, Chapter 3, Section 7.2, Section 7.3, Section 7.4,
Appendix 1, TRADEMARKS
August 2020 C ■Added or modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, WARRANTY
April 2021 D ■Added functions
Firmware update function, MELSOFT connection, SLMP communication function, Simple CPU
communication function, BACnet function
■Added or modified parts
RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Chapter 1, Section 2.3, Chapter 3, Section 4.2, 4.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1,
9.6, 9.7, Appendix 2, 4, 6, TRADEMARKS
December 2021 E ■Added or modified parts
RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Appendix 6, 7
April 2022 F ■Added or modified parts
INTRODUCTION, RELEVANT MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1,
Chapter 3, Section 7.3, Appendix 2, 7
April 2023 G ■Added or modified parts
INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 2.3, 4.3, 5.3, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, Chapter 8, 9, 10, Appendix 2, 4, 7
October 2023 H ■Added or modified parts
RELEVANT MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.3, Chapter 3, Section
4.2, 4.3, 5.2, 7.3, 7.4, Chapter 9, Appendix 2, 4, 7

Japanese manual number: SH-082024-H

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot
be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

 2018 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

174
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation
Range of production
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the seven (7) years after production of the product is
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall discontinued.
be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the after production is discontinued.
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held
responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or 3. Overseas service
testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
module. overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a
secondary loss from warranty liability
designated place. Note that after manufacture and Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall
shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution not be liable for compensation to:
period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the
warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) responsibility of Mitsubishi.
months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether
[Gratis Warranty Range] foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the compensation for damages to products other than
usage state, usage methods and usage environment, Mitsubishi products.
etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
and caution labels on the product. 5. Changes in product specifications
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical
charged for in the following cases. documents are subject to change without prior notice.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or 6. Product application
handling, carelessness or negligence by the
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable
user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or
controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
software design.
application will not lead to a major accident even if
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications,
any problem or fault should occur in the
etc., to the product by the user.
programmable controller device, and that backup and
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside
user's device, Failure that could have been of the device for any problem or fault.
avoided if functions or structures, judged as
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's
designed and manufactured for applications in general
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public
standards, had been provided.
could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
4. Failure that could have been avoided if other power plants operated by respective power
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) companies, and applications in which a special quality
designated in the instruction manual had been assurance system is required, such as for railway
correctly serviced or replaced. companies or public service purposes shall be excluded
5. Relay failure or output contact failure caused by from the programmable controller applications.
usage beyond the specified life of contact In addition, applications in which human life or property
(cycles). that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such medical applications, incineration and fuel devices,
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded
wind and water damage. from the programmable controller range of applications.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by However, in certain cases, some applications may be
scientific technology standards at time of possible, providing the user consults their local
shipment from Mitsubishi. Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility requirements of the project, and providing that all
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
user. solely at the user's discretion.
(3) Mitsubishi shall have no responsibility or liability for any
problems involving programmable controller trouble and
system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized
access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

175
 TRADEMARKS
Anywire and AnyWireASLINK are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Anywire Corporation.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

176 SH(NA)-082026ENG-H
Manual number: SH(NA)-082026ENG-H
MODEL: FX5-U-ENET-E
MODEL CODE: 09R736

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14, YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME, HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA 461-8670, JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.